Canon Mvx3i e

Video Product
MVX3i E
No. D17-7516 Digital Video Camera PAL
Canon Inc.
Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
c CANON INC. 2003 First Edition : Aug. 2003
First Print : Aug. 2003
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
CONTENTS
1. Product Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-1 Concepts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-2 Main Features ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-2-1 Features and Design ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1-2-2 Enhanced Still Image Function ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1-2-3 Support for Camera Direct Print and PictBridge ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
1-2-4 DV Messenger ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
1-3 Function and Performance Comparison Chart --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
2. Technical Explanation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
2-1 Design ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
2-1-1 Design Concept -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
2-2 High Magnification Zoom Lens ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11
2-2-1 Lens Concept ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
2-3 DV Messenger 2 (DV Messenger Version2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
2-3-1 Required Equipment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
2-3-2 To Use DV Messenger ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13
2-3-3 Operating Environment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
2-3-4 Comparison of DVM 1.0 and 2.0 Specifications ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
2-3-5 DVM 2.0 Compatible Camcorder ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
2-4 PictBridge ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
2-4-1 About PictBridge ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16
2-4-2 Signal Processing Relationship between a Camera and Printer Using the Current Canon Camera Direct Print ---- 24
2-4-3 Camcorder Compatibility with PictBridge ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
2-4-4 Support for MVX3i PictBridge Specifications -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
3. Performance and Functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
4. System Diagram (Common to all Models) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
5. Overview of Viewfinder / LCD Panel Displays -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
5-1 Camera Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
5-2 VCR Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 45
5-3 Card/Camera Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
5-4 Card Playback Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
5-5 Menu Display --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
5-6 Card-Related Screen Displays -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
5-7 Direct Print Setting Screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 76
5-8 Print designations ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
5-9 Warning Displays ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
MVX3i E
1. Product Overview
1-1 Concepts
The Ultimate Megapixel Camcorder Model

Featuring High Image Quality,
High Performance, and Powerful Functions
Featuring high-quality movies rivaling 3CCD models together with powerful functions for a wide range of users
◆ Two-Megapixel System and High-Performance Lens for Superior Quality Movies and Still Images
RGB primary color 2.2 megapixels CCD + DIGIC DV chip
◆ Functional and Elegant Design
◆ Direct Print for enhancing the attraction of 2.0-megapixel still images with image quality equivalent to
digital cameras
Full support of dye sublimation printers, BJ printers, and PictBridge printers
◆ Improved compatibility with PC and network environments
Recording of MPEG-4 card movies and support for USB streaming
◆ Support for popular functions in top-range models
Manual audio level adjustment, level meter indicator, and custom key
◆ Complete range of specs for meeting all customer needs
Large, 3.5-inch LCD monitor, built-in flashlight, Super Night mode, and more
1-2 Main Features

(1) High image quality for Mega Pixel Movies and Still Images
● Built-in 1 / 3.4-inch CCD with 2.2 megapixels RGB primary color
● High-quality Mega Pixel image processing using DIGIC DV and VIC3 chips
● Built-in video flash and support for Video Flash Light VFL-1
(2) Slim, horizontal design

● Full Spec & All in One with slim, horizontal design
● Equipped with 3.5-inch LCD monitor and full set of connector jacks
(3) Incorporating 10x high-performance, high image quality lens

● Optical image stabilization allows shooting of high-quality images with minimized effects from hand shaking
(4) Enhanced multimedia support

● Memory card movie recording (MPEG-4)
● Equipped with USB interface
● IEEE1394/USB file transfer
● Web camera functions (DV Messenger 2, remote monitoring camera) / Addition of new network position
(5) Enhanced digital camera functions

● UXGA (1632 × 1224) size still images recording
● 3-point range finding frame selection AF
● AEB shooting function (±0, +0.5 EV, ±0.5 EV)
● Camera Direct Print support (CP-100 / 200 / 300,CP-10, BJ 895PD / 535PD / F890PD, PIXUS 50i), PictBridge support
(6) Built-in white LED

● Uses as auxiliary light for close-up shots of 0 lx and red eye suppression
(7) My Camera audio support New Feature
1
MVX3i E
1-2-1 Features and Design
Advanced shoe
Built-in flash Program AE

selector dial
Manual focus ring
Audio level button
Control button
Custom key
Zoom lens Exposure lock / Exposure

correction button
1-2-2 Enhanced Still Image Function

(1) 2,000,000 pixels still image recording
◆ UXGA (1632 × 1224) size recording
(2) Compatible with Video Flash Light VFL-1

◆ Compatible with Advanced Accessory Shoe
◆ Flashlight with 15 guide numbers + 3W video light
2
MVX3i E
(3) AEB photography function

◆ 3 (Normal, Under, Over) continuous shots with automatic changes in exposure
Under Normal exposure Over
(4) AF frame selection function
(5) Simultaneous recording of motion videos and still images

◆ Simply pressing the Photo button while recording motion videos to tape allows recording of a still image (VGA) to the memory
card
Still image
recording
Tape recording
3
MVX3i E
1-2-3 Support for Camera Direct Print and PictBridge

Easy connection and easy printing
◆ Easy printing of still images recorded to a memory card
Card size prints Camera Direct Print compatible printer

MVX 3i E
Still image
Printer cable CP-10

CP-100/200/300
Camera Direct compatible BJ printers : BJ 895PD, 535PD, F890PD, and PIXUS 50i
Printer control at DVC side
Support for PictBridge printers
1-2-4 DV Messenger
A peer-to-peer type bidirectional communications software program for linking digital video camcorders and PCs.
The following are the main changes at DVM2.0 (updated from DVM1.0).
◆ USB streaming and camera / VCR control.
◆ USB file transfer.
◆ Mode select function (Camera ⇔ VCR) in networking operation.
◆ Remote-control capturing of still pictures.
◆ Remote-control unattended monitoring camera function.
◆ Indications of various statuses, and improved GUI design.
Home 1 Home 2
Internet
IEEE1394
IEEE1394
or USB
or USB
View/Chat View/Chat
Control Control
4
MVX3i E
1-3 Function and Performance Comparison Chart
Item MVX3i E
Camera
Image sensing Image size Tape 1/3.4-inch
device Card 1/3.4-inch
System (filter) Interlacing (RGB primary color)
Total number of pixels Approx. 2,200,000 pixels (1752(H) × 1258(V))
Effective pixels Tape Approx. 1,770,000 pixels (1536(H) × 1152(V))
16:9 Approx. 1,500,000 pixels (1632(H) × 918(V))
Card Approx. 2,000,000 pixels (1632(H) × 1224(V))
Lens Nominal focal length Tape 4.7 to 47 mm (Approx. 40.7 to 407 mm) / 10×
(35mm equivalent) / Zoom 16:9 4.7 to 47 mm (Approx. 41.8 to 418 mm) / 10×
magnification Card 5.2 to 47 mm (Approx. 42.5 to 383 mm) / 9×
Digital zoom Magnifica- Tape 40× / 200×
magnification tion Card 36× (Except for Night and Super Night mode)
System Tape Memory readout
Card Memory readout
F number Tape F1.6 to 1.9
Card F1.8 to 2.8
Aperture leaves Six iris aperture leaves
Zoom speed Multistage adjustable speed
Filter diameter 46mm P0.75
Noise reduction Camera Tape Circulation type NR + median filter
Motion
Card video ×
Still
image Chroma-only, median filter
Recorder C-NR system
Minimum Auto mode Approx. 19 lx
illumination Tv mode Approx. 4.7 lx
Night mode Approx. 1.3 lx
Image Image stabilization system Optical type (lens shift)
stabilization Sensing method Angular velocity sensing
Shooting functions
AE mode Program AE Tape Full Auto
Auto mode, Tv mode, Av mode, Surf & Snow mode, Spotlight,
Night mode, Super Night mode
Card Full Auto
Auto mode, Tv mode, Av mode, Surf & Snow mode, Spotlight,
Night mode, Super Night mode
Photometric Tape Center-bottom- Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Tv mode, Av mode, Night mode,
weighted average Super Night mode
Evaluative photometry
(128-segments) + Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode (Sand & Snow mode)
All area photometry
Card Evaluative photometry Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Tv mode, Av mode, Night mode,
(128-segments) Super Night mode
Evaluative photometry
(128-segments) + Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode (Sand & Snow mode)
All area photometry
5
MVX3i E
Item MVX3i E
Shooting functions
Exposure AE lock ● (EXP button is pressed) (Prohibited in Green mode)
adjustment AE shift ×
Exposure correction ● (EXP is pressed, and then the EXP button up and down operation is
used ± 11 steps)
Gain setting / Increased sensitivity Auto
Back light correction ● (when backlight correction is selected in the menu or with the
custom key)
Shutter speed Tv mode Tape 9 levels
(1/6, 1/12, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec)
Card 10 levels
(1/2, 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/25, 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500 sec)
Auto Tape 1/25 to 1/500 sec
Card 1/25 to 1/500 sec
Night mode / Tape 1/2 to 1/500 sec
Super Night mode Card 1/2 to 1/500 sec
Aperture value (in Av mode) Tape Wide end: F1.6, F2.0, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4.0, F4.8, F5.6, F6.7, F8.0
Tele end: F1.8, F2.0, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4.0, F4.8, F5.6, F6.7, F8.0
Card Wide end: F1.8, F2.0, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4.0, F4.8, F5.6, F6.7, F8.0
Tele end: F2.8, F3.4, F4.0, F4.8, F5.6, F6.7, F8.0
Auxiliary Flash Built-in flash
light source External: Video Flash Light VFL-1 (Compatible with Advanced
Accessory Shoe)
Video light External: Video Flash Light VFL-1 and Video Light VL-3
(Compatible with Advanced Accessory Shoe)
Battery Video Light VL-10Li
White LED ● (Red eye suppression in built-in Flash shooting, auxiliary light source
in Super Night mode, auxiliary light for low brightness AF)
Image quality Color gain adjustment ×
adjustment Hue adjustment ×
(custom preset) Sharpness adjustment ×
Setup adjustment ×
White Balance Auto ●
Set ● (1)
Preset Outdoor (5600 K), indoor (3200 K)
System TTL, 128 segments
Focus Mode AF/MF, forced infinity
Correction method In MF: Focus ring operation
Range finding Tape ×
frame display Card Full Auto: Screen center
Other: 3-point range finding frame mode: Selectable from three range
finding frames
Zoom Speed Multi-level adjustable speed (Optical: 8 speeds, Digital: 2 speeds)
16:9 System High resolution 16:9
Area marker display ×
Digital fade Tape Motion video Auto Fade, Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
(Activated by pressing the Start/Stop button.)
Still Image ×
Card Motion video ×
Still Image ×
6
MVX3i E
Item MVX3i E
Shooting functions
Digital effect Tape Motion video/still Image Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
Card Motion video/still Image Black and White
Card mix Tape Motion video/still Image Lumi key, Chroma key, Camera Chroma key, Animation
(Corner, Straight, Random)
Card Motion video/still Image ×
Multi-screen Tape Motion video/still Image Supported (disabled in Full Auto mode,Night mode and Super Night mode)
Card Motion video/still Image ×
Capture speed Shutter speed Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames)
: 1/50 sec
Shutter speed Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (8 frames), Slow (12 frames)
: 1/12.5 sec
Shutter speed Manual, Fast (8 frames), Normal (16 frames), Slow (24 frames)
: 1/8 sec
Number of split screens 4 / 9 / 16
Motion video Mode Tape Normal
shooting Card 352 × 288 dots (Approx. 2 min), 176 × 144 dots (Approx. 6 min):
SDC-8M 12.5 frame/sec MPEG-4 (Audio monaural)
Still image Recording system Tape Frame image
Card Progressive photo (Supported by all modes) Field image JPEG
Single image Tape ●
Card ●
Continuous Tape ×
shooting Card ● 2 frames/second, With built-in flash: 2 frames/second
AEB Tape ×
Card ● Exposure correction amounts (±0, -0.5, +0.5 steps without strobe flash)
Image size Card 1632 × 1224
1280 × 960
640 × 480
Image quality Card Super Fine, Fine, Normal (Normal only during simultaneous recording
in Tape mode)
Photo button Form Dedicated still image button
Pressed halfway down Supported (Only during recording standby)
Still image confirmation (Card Review) ×
Strobe support (models) ● (Built-in flash, external VFL-1)
Recorded video Frame image
Frame processing Simulated frame (In Night mode and Super Night mode [Slow])
Negative-positive reversal ×
Built-in video light × (Equipped with white LED [Super Night mode], built-in flash and
compatible with Video Flash Light VFL-1)
VL-3 can be attached to Advanced Accessory Shoe
Zebra pattern ● (Display of sections at 95IR or higher, Level fixed)
Color bar ×
Self-timer 10 seconds/Remote controller: 2 seconds
Interval timer ×
Clear scan ×
Memory card SD memory cards and MultiMediaCards supported
REC search ●
REC review ●
7
MVX3i E
Item MVX3i E
Shooting functions
Standby switch ×
Power save (After 5 minutes in Recording pause) Power shutoff
Displayed text recording ×
Audio Tape PCM digital recording 16-bit 2-ch (48KHz)
12-bit 4-ch (32 KHz) Simultaneous 4-channel recording not possible
Card (In motion video recording) 16-bit 1ch (8 KHz) 4-bit
ADPCM digital recording
Wind screen ● With ON/OFF switch (Built-in microphone only)
EVF Size 0.33-inch (TFT color)
Pixels 113,000 pixels
Brightness adjustment ×
Color adjustment ×
Movable ●
Monitor LCD Size 3.5-inch
Pixels 246,000 pixels
Brightness adjustment ●
Movable ● Mirror shooting supported
VCR
Playback Frame playback Forward / Reverse
system Slow playback (±1/3 × speed) Forward / Reverse
2× SP playback Forward / Reverse
1× SP playback Forward / Reverse
Cue/review 11.5× speed
Search Photo search ●
Date search ●
Index search ×
Playback effects Playback zoom (5× zoom) ● (In tape playback and card still image playback)
D. effects Tape Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
Card ×
D. fade Tape Auto Fade, Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
Card ×
Multi screen 4, 9, or 16 screens
Data code display Time and Date display
Card Slide show ●
Forward jumping in playback ●
Audio dubbing ●
AV insert DV terminal input ●
AV terminal / S terminal input ●
Zero set memory ●
Editing functions Simple editing ×
Special effects ×
8
MVX3i E
Item MVX3i E
System
Inter face Microphone input ●
(Terminal) Headphone output ●
DV terminal Input/output
S-Video terminal Input/output
AV terminal Input/output, φ3.5mm mini-jack
Editing terminals ×
USB port mini-B Receptacle
Memory card file transfer ● (USB file transfer, IEEE1394 file transfer)
Analog → DV signal conversion ●
Direct print ● (with connection of Card Photo Printers CP-10 and CP-100, CP-200,
CP-300, BJ Printers BJ 895PD, 535PD, F890PD, and Pixus 50i),
when connected to PictBridge compatible printer
World clock ●
Text titles ×
Speaker ●
Confirmation beep ●
Tally lamp ●
Remote control cord 1, 2 supported
Accessory shoe Compatible with Advanced Accessory Shoe
Video ID ●
Recording modes SP,LP
Custom keys ● (One of the following: Image stabilizer, Back light correction, or
Zebra pattern)
DV control ×
My Camera Startup Screen, Startup Sound, Shutter Sound, Operation Sound,
Self-timer Sound
Internal battery charging ●
Backup power Lithium coin battery (CR2025)
Battery pack power BP-500 Series lithium ion battery
9
MVX3i E
● External View
Fig. 1
10
MVX3i E
2. Technical Explanation
2-1 Design
2-1-1 Design Concept

(1) CLASSY DESIGN
A sense of high quality and superior performance are expressed in this top single-CCD model through the smart and elegant
contours that users have come to expect from Canon and that clearly identify this model as a member of the same lineup as the
MVX150i E
(2) SLIM & REFINED

Emphasis on lens barrel for highlighting its performance as an optical device.
Low-contrast, two-tone design matching the mold for expressing a sense of elegance.
MEGAPIXEL BADGE identifying its 2.0 megapixel performance.
One-point color used for microphone unit on the front.
(3) EASY OPERATION

An independent program dial has been added for enhanced ease of operation when shooting.
The design of the zoom unit is based on the MVX150i E to allow a unified operating interface for Canon's horizontal models and
identify it as a model of the series.
2-2 High Magnification Zoom Lens
2-2-1 Lens Concept

• The basic section uses the MVX1 E lens to provide Canon's proven high image quality, six high-grade iris apertures, optical shift
image stabilizer, and ND independent driving.
• Adjustable control of open aperture diameter when shooting still images allows high resolution.
• New ND filter (three pattern vapor deposition) for reducing drops in resolution and ghosting when the ND filter section is
inserted.
11
MVX3i E
2-3 DV Messenger 2 (DV Messenger Version2)

DV Messenger 2 software operates in conjunction with Windows Messenger, which is included in standard installations of Windows XP.
With this software, you can use your digital camcorder and the Internet to enjoy the following operations.
● Realtime camera motion video communication (videophone)

You can use a camcorder connected to a computer to send video and audio in realtime so that you can talk with
another person in the same way as a videophone.
● Transmissions of motion video

Tape video and audio recorded on a video tape can be sent to another person.
● Camcorder operations (Canon digital camcorders only)

You can operate camcorders connected to your computer and the camcorder of the other person. (To operate the camcorder of the other
person, DV Messenger Version 2 must be installed on the other person's computer. If you have DV Messenger Version 1, download
the DV Network Software from the Canon web site to update the software.)
* Not compatible with the DV Messenger 1.
● File transfer (Canon digital camcorders only)
You can upload files stored in the memory card of the other person's camcorder to your own computer. (DV Messenger Version 2 and the
AV/C Camera Storage Subunit-WIA* driver are required when using a DV (IEEE1394) cable to connect the camcorder to the computer,
and DV Messenger Version 2 and the USB Video Class driver are required when connecting with a USB cable.)
*: Windows Image Acquisition
* Do not connect both cables at the same time.
● Remote monitoring camera
You can use DV Messenger to connect to your computer from a remote location and view video image using your camcorder.
(Your computer and camcorder must be turned on the power.)
* This function cannot be used for a period of more than 24 hours.
Available functions in Canon digital camcorders
Some functions may not be available depending on your Canon digital camcorder model.
Check the available functions using the table below.
• AV/C Camera Storage Subunit-WIA driver: Available only for models marked by *.
(MV550i E or later model with a card slot)
• USB Video Class driver: Available for models marked by .
(MVX3i or later network mode compatible model)
• Video camera operation: The following camcorders can be operated from a computer.
(MV20 E and later models except for MV200 E, MV200i E)
• File transfer: Files can be transferred from the memory card in the other person's camcorder only when the other person's
camcorder is one of the models marked by *.
(MV550i E or later model with a card slot)
• Changing modes by computer: Modes can be changed by computer only for models marked by .
(MVX3i or later network mode compatible model)
MV20 E XM1 E MV30 E MV30i E MV300i E MV3 MC E
MV3 MCi E MV450 MC E MV450 MCi E MV430 MC E MV430 MCi E MV400 E
MV400i E XL1S E MVX1 E MVX1i E MV4 E MV4i MC E
MV4i E MV550i E* MV530i E* MV500i E MV500 E MV5i MC E*
MV5i E MV5 E XM2 E* MVX2i E* MV650i E* MV630i E*
MV600i E MV600 E MVX150i E* MVX100i E* MV6i MC A* MVX3i*
MVX10i*
12
MVX3i E
2-3-1 Required Equipment

• Canon digital camcorder
• Canon DV NETWORK SOFTWARE
• DV (IEEE1394) cable or USB cable
Digital camcorders not supporting network mode must use the DV cable. If using a DV cable, check the shape of the IEEE1394
(DV) terminal installed in your computer before selecting the DV cable.
4-pin
6-pin
• Speaker or headphones (when using DV Messenger)
2-3-2 To Use DV Messenger

DV Messenger can only be used on computers with installations of Microsoft Windows XP and properly operating Windows Messenger
4.5 or later.
Check the following points before installing DV Messenger.
(1) Your computer’s OS is Windows XP, and Windows Messenger 4.5 or later is installed.*
(2) Windows Messenger is functioning, and audio chat or video chat is enabled.* (In version 2, video chat may not be enabled until the
USB Video Class drivers are installed.)
(3) If using a router to connect to the Internet, a UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) compatible router should be used.** (Some modems
already have a router function. For details, refer to the modem’s operation manual or other technical information.)
* This software is compatible with Windows XP only. It cannot be used with other OS. Also, Windows Messenger version 4.5 or
later must be operating properly.
** If a router is used with this software, it must be a UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) compatible router. Other types of routers
cannot be used. For details, inquire at your internet service provider, line provider, or the router manufacturer, or check the
operation manual for the router.
! Notes
When using DV Messenger, the contents stored on the tape and memory card inside your camcorder can be
received by the other person. Be sure to use care to protect your stored information.
13
MVX3i E
2-3-3 Operating Environment

OS : Computers preinstalled with Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition or Professional Edition (Service Pack 1 is
recommended). Operation is not guaranteed in environments where the OS was upgraded.
CPU : Pentium 500 MHz or faster (Pentium 800 MHz or faster is recommended)
RAM : 128 MB or more (256 MB or more is recommended)
Hard disk space : AV/C Camera Storage Subunit-WIA driver: 1 MB or more
USB Video Class driver : 1 MB or more
DV Messenger : 100 MB or more
Video : 800 × 600 dots (1024 × 768 dots or higher is recommended)
High Color (16 bit) or higher is required
Interface : OHCI compatible IEEE1394 interface or USB interface (1.1/2.0)
Other : (Microsoft) Windows Messenger version 4.5 or higher, Sound function, Internet capability*
* Although a dial-up connection using an analog modem can be used, the use of a high-speed line such as ADSL is
preferred.
! Notes
• Operation is not guaranteed for dual CPU computers or custom-built computers.
• Operation is not guaranteed for all computers that meet all of the above recommended environment conditions.
• When connecting with a DV (IEEE1394) cable, connect the camcorder and computer directly with the cable.
• The software may not operate properly when connecting with a DV (IEEE1394) cable and passing through a
repeater or other IEEE1394 device.
• The software may not operate properly when two or more camcorders are connected to a single computer.
• The software may not operate properly when multiple IEEE1394 devices are connected to a single computer
when connecting with a DV (IEEE1394) cable.
• The software may not operate properly if other IEEE1394 devices are connected while the A V/C Camera
Storage Subunit-WIA driver is operating.
DV Messenger usage example
Internet
14
MVX3i E
2-3-4 Comparison of DVM 1.0 and 2.0 Specifications
Function 1.0 2.0

IEEE1394 streaming and camera, VCR control ● ●
IEEE1394 file transfer ● ●
USB streaming and camera, VCR control × ●
USB file transfer × ●
Mode switching function in network mode × ●
Still image remote capture × ●
Remote monitoring robot (monitoring camera function) × ●
Tape time code and other status displays × ●
Transfer permission setting in file units × ●
Display of file thumbnails during transfer × ●
2-3-5 DVM 2.0 Compatible Camcorder
Function IEEE1394 USB

IEEE1394 streaming and camera, VCR control MV20 E *1 ~ ---
IEEE1394 file transfer MV550i E ~ ---
USB streaming and camera, VCR control --- MVX3i ~
USB file transfer --- MVX3i ~
Mode switching function in network mode MVX3i ~ MVX3i ~
Still image remote capture MVX3i ~ MVX3i ~
Remote monitoring robot (monitoring camera function) MVX3i ~ MVX3i ~
Tape time code and other status displays MV20 E *1 ~ MVX3i ~
Transfer permission setting in file units MV550i E ~ MVX3i ~
Display of file thumbnails during transfer MV550i E ~ MVX3i ~
*1: Except for MV200E, 200iE
15
MVX3i E
2-4 PictBridge
2-4-1 About PictBridge
1. Overview
1-1. Background to Establishment

With the popularization of digital cameras, computers, and inkjet printers, an environment is emerging where people can easily create
prints at home. Furthermore, to address the demands of users for convenient printing without using a computer, several companies
have been building systems that directly connect their printers and certain digital camera models to facilitate printing with straightfor-
ward operations. Canon has been doing this with its “Direct Print system”, while Epson has introduced “USB Direct-Print” and
“PhotoPC Direct” and Hewlett-Packard has released the direct photo printing function (only in the US).
The problem with these company-specific direct print systems is that they can only connect digital cameras the companies produce
themselves or those produced by certain allied manufacturers. This means users cannot necessarily connect their own digital cameras
with their own printers.
In recognition of this problem, six companies - Canon Inc., Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Hewlett-Packard Japan, Olympus Optical Co.,
Ltd., Seiko Epson Corporation, and Sony Corporation - have been working together to build a direct print system between digital
cameras and printers that makes no manufacturer distinctions.
Digital Camera Printer
A B H I
C D J K
E F L M
G N
1-2. History
● July 2002: Four companies (Canon, Epson, HP, and Sony) begin work on standardizing a vender-independent direct print system.
● November 2002: Fujifilm and Olympus join, bringing the number of participants to six.
● December 2, 2002: The six DPS promoters (Canon, Epson, Fujifilm, Hewlett-Packard, Olympus, and Sony) make a joint an-
nouncement of the DPS standard (provisional name).
· Release draft of the standard
· Technically, the same as the official version
· Official standard to be announced two months later
● December 3, 2002: The DPS promoters request the Camera and Imaging Products Association (the CIPA) to employ the DPS
standard as the CIPA standard. After accepting the request, the DPS subcommittee is inaugurated and technical examinations
begin.
● February 3, 2003: Official announcement as the CIPA standard.
· Information on the standard is released at http://www.cipa.jp/english/pictbridge/
● Logo certification started on June 9, 2003
16
MVX3i E
1-3. What is PictBridge?

A direct print system that removes barriers between venders.
A B C
A company's method B company's method C company's method
A B C
PictBridge
Interchangeability among venders
1-4. The PictBridge Philosophy

● For users
· Quick what-you-see-is-what-you-get printing using the digital camera’s LCD monitor
· Easy-to-operate printing with intuitive controls
· Reliable interconnection between more digital cameras and more printers
● For venders
· Device manufacturers can readily implement PictBridge support
· Independent of physical interfaces or transport layers*
· Incorporates future extensibility and contributes to the ongoing digital-photo-culture evolution
* PictBridge defines only an application layer in the communication protocol. This independence allows device makers to em-
ploy the standard easily and provides the standard with extensibility for other interfaces besides USB.
17
MVX3i E
2. Features
2-1. The PictBridge Features

● Versatile printing
· Print images as displayed on the digital camera’s LCD monitor (see Figure 1)
· Print multiple images selected from the digital camera’s LCD monitor
· Print DPOF-specified images automatically (see Figure 2)
· Print an index of all images
· Print all images
1) Connect the cable

USB cable USB cable
2/10 PB PB
2) Display the image 3) Press the print button 2) Select the image 3) Press the print button
Figure 1 Figure 2
● More convenient print settings

· Specify image cropping before printing (see Figure 3)
· Print multiple copies of the same image USB cable
· Add dates to prints 2/10 PB
· Specify image size of prints (see Figure 4)
2) Set the printing area 3) Press the print

button
Figure 3
● Printer status information
· Connection established
· Printer errors (see Figure 5)
· Print progress
· Printing complete
· Cable can be disconnected safely
Figure 4
● Additional features
· Cancel printing
· Restart from recoverable errors USB cable
PB
Paper is empty
Stop
Figure 5
18
MVX3i E
2-2. Technical Features

PictBridge employs a communication protocol architecture that emphasizes flexibility and extensibility.
Specifically, this architecture provides a DPS layer, a conversion layer between the existing transport layer and application layer, that
performs translations with the PTP protocol. In effect, PictBridge standardizes the interface protocol between the DPS layer and the
application layer.
DIGITAL CAMERA PRINTER

DPS application DPS application
Application Layer Print Storage Storage Print
Client Server Client Server
DPS Operation
& DPS Event
DPS Layer
PTP Operation
DPS
Discovery
DPS Layer DPS Layer Discovery
DPS
Discovery
& PTP Event
Transport Layer PTP Transport PTP Transport
Physical Layer USB Physical USB Physical
Existing
Standard
Figure 6
(1) USB Interface, PTP Communication Protocol

· Employing USB (interface), a standard computer interface, and PTP (communication protocol) gives PictBridge versatility and
a close affinity with existing systems
· Using the USB standard allows printers to power digital cameras (up to 500 mA)
⇒ Users can print without worrying about AC adapters or remaining battery life
Figure 7
19
MVX3i E
(2) Employs a Client/Server Communication Model

· A virtual Print Client and Storage Server exist in the digital camera and a virtual Print Server and Storage Client reside in the
printer. With this communication format, clients make various requests to servers, and servers, in turn, respond to these requests
Digital Print Print Printer

Camera Client Server
Storage Storage
Server Client
Figure 8
(3) Forward-thinking Transport-independent Interface

· To assure a diversity of connection methods, the interface does not depend on any transport protocol.
As a result, the standard is not limited to the present USB method and can be extended in the future to support network
environments.
Ex. Connections over a LAN

Ex. Wireless connections
20
MVX3i E
3. Specifications
3-1. Print Features

The PictBridge specification defines three support levels - mandatory, recommended, and optional - for each print function.
(See Table 1: Reproduced directly from the CIPA DC-001-2003 standard)
DPS DPS DPS DPS

System Minimum Camera Printer
*1
Features System*2 Support Support
1. Basic Print
1.Single Image Print *3
*4
2.Several selected Images Print
3.DPOF AUTOPRINT Images Print
4.All Images index print
5.All Images Print
2. Advanced print setup
1.Cropping print
2.Copies
3.Data Print
4.Paper size
5.Fixed Size print
*5
6.N-up layout
7.File name print
8.Borderless
3. Printer status information
*6
1.DPS connection established indicate indicate
2.Error occurred indicate indicate
*7
3.Error Status indicate notify
4.Job status indicate notify
5.Cable disconnect enable indicate notify
6.Job Finish indicate notify
4. Printer setup
1.Print quality
2.Paper type
5. Print job control
1.DPS print cancel from DSC support
2.DPOF cable disconnect recovery
3.Paper Out Recover trigger in Printer
4.Error recover UI in DSC
*1 PictBridge Features
*2 PictBridge Minimum Features
*3 M : Mandatory
*4 R : Recommended
*5 O : Optional
*6 indicate : indicate:Device shall(or should) inform the user of the situation
*7 notify : notify:Printer shall(or should) inform the digital camera of the situation via the DPS protocol
Table 1
21
MVX3i E
3-2. System Overview

After connecting the camera to a printer, negotiations between the two devices proceed in the following order.
1) Confirmation that both devices support PictBridge
2) Confirmation of service functions (such as the PictBridge version)
3) Confirmation of capabilities (paper sizes, paper types, print quality, etc.)
4) Print request (user initiates printing while viewing the camera’s user interface)
5) Image file acquisition (printer begins retrieving and printing the image file from the camera)
6) Notification of print completion (printer informs the camera that printing is finished)
1) Confirmation that both devices support

PictBridge
Digital Camera Printer
DPS Discovery DPS Discovery DPS Discovery 2) Confirmation of service functions
User Storage Storage Print Print Storage Print

Device Server Client Server Client Device
3) Confirmation of capabilities
DPS_ConfigurePrintService
Order the start of 4) Print request
printing after setting DPS_GetCapability
the printing conditions
DPS_StartJob 5) Image file acquisition
DPS_GetFileInfo
Storage Data
File Info
DPS_GetFile 6) Notification of print completion
Storage Data to the camera
File
Create the printing data
DPS_NotifyDeviceStatus
Finish printing
Figure 9
22
MVX3i E
4. Logo Certification
4-1. Obtaining Certification

In order to sell a product as PictBridge compliant, logo certification must be obtained, which verifies the guarantee of connectivity.
● Products developed in line with the PictBridge standard receive authorization to use the PictBridge logo from the CIPA if they
satisfy all requirements stipulated in the logo certification guideline.
● The CIPA has designated a third-party agency that handles applications for logo certification.
● The general process to receive logo usage authorization consists of the following steps:
1) The vender purchases the Logo Certification Test Suite, approved by the CIPA, performs the prescribed tests at its own site,
and ensures that the product passes all the tests.
2) The vender submits the necessary applications to a third-party agency, accredited by the CIPA, and receives authorization.
3) The vender pays the following fees to the CIPA-accredited third-party agency.
· Logo licensing fee
· The CIPA administration fee
· Application fee to the third-party agency
4-2. Usage of Mark and Logotype

PictBridge-compliant products that obtain logo certification are permitted to display any of the following mark and logotype on the
product or its packaging.
The mark and logotype can be used independently or in combination. Note, however, there are detailed agreements* governing the
application of the logo; these agreements must be strictly observed when using the logo.
* Size, color, and other details
1) Independent use of mark 2) Independent use of logotype
3) Combined use of mark and logotype
23
MVX3i E
2-4-2 Signal Processing Relationship between a Camera and Printer Using the Current Canon Camera Direct Print
● Dye sublimation printer

Camcorder Printer
Canon's proprietary
communication protocol
Internal image processing by camera Data is received from the camera,and
then printing processing is performed
● BJ Printer (PictBridge not supported)
Camcorder
Canon's proprietary
communication protocol
File transfer from camera JPEG extraction, image processing,
and printing processing are performed
in the printer
● Signal processing relationship between a camera and PictBridge compatible printer
Camcorder PictBridge compatible printer
PictBridge protcol
(common specifications)
File transfer from camera JPEG extraction, image processing,
and printing processing are performed
in the printer
24
MVX3i E
2-4-3 Camcorder Compatibility with PictBridge

(1) The specifications are virtually identical to the current Canon proprietary standard (Camera Direct).
The user interface (UI) is different between Camera Direct and PictBridge.
(2) Localization work is minimized.

• The display of new errors will be supported using the display of existing warning messages.
* Paper errors, ink errors, printer errors, file errors
(3) The communication system for connecting printers supporting both PictBridge and Canon Camera Direct will follow the printer's
instruction.
• PictBridge will be the default standard when connecting with a BJ printer
• The Camera Direct standard, which provides a shorter printing time, will be used for connection to dye sublimation printers.
* However, PictBridge will be used for connection to dye sublimation printers with some camcorders due to hardware
limitations.
(4) New products starting from MVX3i will support PictBridge.
2-4-4 Support for MVX3i PictBridge Specifications
PictBridge specifications MVX3i

Element Description PictBridge support Camera Direct support
Default quality
normal
Image quality Default (1 type) 1 type
draft
fine
Default Default ×
L L L
2L 2L 2L
Postcard size Postcard Postcard
Card size Card ×
Paper size 4" × 6" 4" × 6" 4" × 6"
A4 A4 A4
Letter Letter Letter
89mm Roll(L) ● ×
127mm Roll(2L) ● ×
210mm Roll(A4) ● ×
25
MVX3i E
PictBridge specifications MVX3i

Element Description PictBridge support Camera Direct support
Default Default
Plain Paper Plain Paper Assumes usage of Professional
Paper type
Photo Paper Photo Paper*1 Photo Paper
Fast Photo Paper Fast Photo Paper*2
Default ● ×
1-Up layout ● ●
Layout*3
Index Print × ×
1-Up Borderless Printing ● ●
Default ×
ImageOptimize*4 off × No function
on ×
Default × ×
Trimming off ● ●
on ● ●
Default ● ---
EXIF Format ● JPEG only ● JPEG(EXIF)only
File types
TIFF Format × ×
DPOF × ×
Fixed Sizes*5 Default × No function
Default ● ×
Date print off ● ×
on ● ×
Default ×
File name print off × *6
on ×
*1: Super Photo Paper / Matte Photo Paper

*2: Professional Photo Paper
*3: Camera Direct Supports With Border and No Border
*4: The user can make his or her own settings at the printer
Example: Image retouching and special effects can be added.
*5: For instance, images can be printed L size on an A4 paper.
*6: File numbers can also be printed if DPOF/Index Print is selected when combined with a dye sublimation printer.
This is not supported by BJ printers.
26
MVX3i E
3. Performance and Functions

MVX3i E
1 Type VCR- integrated camera
2 Recording system Rotating two- head helical scan azimuth recording
Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
Complies with PAL system (625 lines, 50 fields)
2-1 Video signal recording system Digital component recording.
Sampling frequency Y = 13.5MHz
R-Y, B-Y = 6.75MHz
Quantized bits 8bits
2-2 Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording.
16-bit, 48KHz 2 ch
12-bit, 32KHz 4 ch (Stereo 1 and 2)
2-3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot system
2-4 Tape speed Approx. 18.83mm/second. (in SP mode)
Approx. 12.57mm/second. (in LP mode)
2-5 Head drum
Drum diameter φ 21.7mm
Rpms 9000 rpm
Heads Video heads: 2
3 Recording/ playback time 80 minutes maximum (in SP mode)
120 minutes maximum (in LP mode)
Continuous recording/actual recording time and continuous playback time using battery
Continuous recording/ BP-511/BP-512 Approx. 110 minutes/approx. 65 minutes
actual recording time (EVF) BP-522 Approx. 235 minutes/approx. 135 minutes
BP-535 Approx. 375 minutes/approx. 215 minutes
Continuous recording/ BP-511/BP-512 Approx. 90 minutes/approx. 50 minutes
actual recording time (LCD) BP-522 Approx. 185 minutes/approx. 105 minutes
BP-535 Approx. 290 minutes/approx. 165 minutes
Continuous playback time BP-511/BP-512 Approx. 115 minutes (When using LCD)
BP-522 Approx. 250 minutes (When using LCD)
BP-535 Approx. 400 minutes (When using LCD)
4 Cassette tape specifications Mini DVC specs
4-1 Tape type Vapor- deposited metal tape
4-2 Tape width 6.35mm Vapor- deposited metal tape
4-3 Tape thickness 7µm or 5.3µm
5 Camera
5-1 Image sensing device 1/ 3.4 - inch interlaced CCD
5-1-1 Pixels
Total number of pixels Approx. 2,200,000 (1752(H)×1258(V))
Effective pixels Tape recording : Approx.1,770,000 (1536(H)×1152(V))
Card recording : Approx.2,000,000 (1632(H)×1224(V))
16:9 recording : Approx.1,500,000 (1632(H)×918(V))
5-1-2 Filter RGB primary color filter
5-1-3 Color separation system Differential readout
5-1-4 Signal configuration PAL standard color TV signal
5-1-5 Scanning system 625 lines × 50 fields / 25 frames
5-1-6 Minimum subject illumination
In Night mode Approx. 1.3 lx (1/2 sec. shutter speed)
In Tv mode Approx. 4.7 lx (1/6 sec. shutter speed)
In Auto mode Approx. 19 lx
5-1-7 Subject illumination range Approx. 1.3 lx to approx. 100,000 lx
5-2 Photo lens
5-2-1 Nominal focal length
During tape recording Normal 4.7 to 47 mm (Approx. 40.7 to 407 mm) 10×
16:9 4.7 to 47 mm (Approx. 41.8 to 418 mm) 10×
During card recording 5.2 to 47 mm (Approx. 42.5 to 383 mm) 9×
27
MVX3i E
5-2-2 Nominal diametric ratio

During tape recording 1 : 1.6 (F1.9 on tele end)
During card recording 1 : 1.6 (F2.8 on tele end)
5-2-3 Lens configuration 12 elements in 9 groups, one aspherical lens with high-refraction glass is used
5-2-4 Focus adjustment Inner focus type. Manual adjustment from focus ring
5-2-5 Minimum object distance During tape recording : 20 mm (AF link:Wide end),During card recording : 60 mm (AF link:Wide
end) 1m across full zoom range (from lens tip)
5-2-6 Power zoom Multi-level adjustable power zoom, Slide lever operation, Zoom speed can be adjusted by mov-
ing slide lever.
Zoom speed
Optical zoom Approx. 2.5 sec. to approx. 30 sec.
When using digital zoom Approx. 4.5 sec. to approx. 40 sec.
Manual zoom not possible (No zoom ring)
5-2-7 Focal length display None. Simple zoom display inside finder
5-2-8 Macro mechanism Wide end macro
5-2-9 Macro shooting distance During tape recording : 20mm (from lens front), during card recording : 60mm (from lens front)
5-2-10 Filter diameter 46 mm P0.75
5-2-11 Accessory lens and filter Can use WD-H46, TL-H46, or FS-H6U
5-2-12 Lens hood Supported
5-2-13 Lens cap Included; Screw-on type
5-3 Digital zoom
During tape recording Normal 40× / 220× (35 mm film equivalent : 1,628 mm, 8,140 mm)
16:9 40× / 200× (35 mm film equivalent : 1,672 mm, 8,360 mm)
During card recording 36× (35 mm film equivalent : 1,526 mm)
* Only optical zoom is available during Night mode and Super Night mode (tape, card)
5-4 Image stabilization function Supported
5-4-1 System Optical system (lens shift)
5-4-2 Sensing system Angular velocity sensing (Using piezoelectric vibration sensor)
5-5 Shooting modes
5-5-1 Tape mode Records normal motion video (interlaced scanning) and still images (frame recording : approx.
6.5 sec) on mini DV cassette. Also, when an SD memory card (MultiMediaCard) is inserted and
“Card ” is selected in the “Photo Record” menu, still images (640 × 480) can be recorded to
the memory card while recording motion video to tape (Simultaneous recording)
Card mode Records still images (JPEG) and motion video (MPEG-4, 15 (12.5) frame/sec) on SD memory
card (MultiMediaCard).
See the memory card system on page 32
5-6 Exposure control
5-6-1 Photometric system Center-bottom-weighted average : Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Tv(Shutter Priority) mode, Av
(Iris Priority)mode, Night mode, Super Night mode
Whole area average photometry + 128-segments evaluative photometry:Spotlight mode, Surf &
Snow mode
5-6-2 AE function
a. Program AE Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Surf & Snow mode, Spotlight mode, Night mode, Super Night mode
b. Tv mode (Shutter Priority mode)
Shutter speed setting
During tape recording 1/6 sec, 1/12 sec, 1/25 sec, 1/50 sec, 1/120 sec, 1/250 sec, 1/500 sec, 1/1000 sec, 1/2000 sec
During card recording 1/2 sec, 1/3 sec, 1/6 sec, 1/12 sec, 1/25 sec, 1/50 sec, 1/120 sec, 1/250 sec, 1/500 sec
c. Av mode (Iris Priority mode)
Fixed iris value
During tape recording F1.6, F2.0, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4.0, F4.8, F5.6, F6.7, F8.0 (at Wide end)
During card recording F1.8, F2.0, F2.4, F2.8, F3.4, F4.0, F4.8, F5.6, F6.7, F8.0 (at Wide end)
d. During Night mode and Super Night mode
1/2 sec to 1/500 sec
Super Night mode : White LED automatically turns on when the subject brightness turns darker.
5-6-3 Exposure correction
Exposure lock Exposure is locked by pressing Exposure Lock button. Exposure level can be adjusted from
multi dial after locking exposure (Full Auto mode excluded).
±11 levels (–11 to ±0 to +11).
Indicated as AE number (AE ±0) inside viewfinder.
28
MVX3i E
5-7 AF (Autofocus)
5-7-1 System TTL-Video signal sensing AF (In low available light, auxiliary [white LED] lights automatically
for minimum object distance sensing)
5-7-2 AF range finding area
During Tape mode Screen center
During Card mode Selected from three locations on screen (screen center only during Full Auto mode)
5-7-3 Range finding frame display
During Tape mode None
During Card mode Supported (3-point range finding frame display : User can select (green) one of three range
finding frames)
5-7-4 AF operating range
During Tape mode 20mm to ∞ (Wide end); 1m to ∞ in full zoom area (From lens front)
During Card mode 60mm to ∞ (Wide end); 1m to ∞ in full zoom area (From lens front)
5-7-5 AF operating illumination range 50 lx - 100,000 lx
5-7-6 AF mode switching Continuous AF/manual focus. AF ON/OFF switching is possible in all but Full Auto mode (op-
eration by pressing focus button).
Manual focus In manual focusing (AF OFF), manual Focus [MF] display appears inside viewfinder.
5-7-7 Forced infinity setting Holding down the Focus button (approx.3 sec.) sets the focus to Infinity and displays [MF ∞] in
the viewfinder.
5-8 Viewfinder 0.33- inch Color LCD (Approx. 113,000 pixels)
ON when LCD monitor is closed (panel facing inwards) and during mirror shooting
5-8-1 Rotation Possible
5-8-2 Detaching eyepiece Not possible
5-8-3 Diopter movement range +1.5 to –5.5 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece)
5-8-4 Lens configuration Single-lens configuration
5-9 LCD panel 3.5-inch Color LCD Approx. 246,000 pixels [1120(H) × 220(V)]TFT active matrix drive RGB
delta arrangement ON when LCD monitor not closed (panel facing inwards)
5-9-1 Angle adjustment Possible; Monitoring is possible for high- angle, low- angle, and face-to-face shooting.
5-9-2 Information display Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining
tape, time code, warnings and other indications. Limited display*2 during mirror shooting.
Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder (CVF)
Camera mode and Camera/Card recording mode VCR mode and Card Playback mode
LCD panel position
LCD panel CVF LCD panel CVF
Panel closed (panel facing inwards) OFF ON OFF ON
Panel closed (panel facing outwards) ON OFF ON OFF
Panel open ON OFF ON OFF
Mirror shooting *2 ON *1 ON ON OFF
*1 : Mirror mode possible by menu selection.

*2 : No text is displayed on the LCD panel during Mirror mode. EVF and AVout are the same as normal.
5-10 White balance adjustment TTL 128-segments, New white extraction system FAWB. With set/preset (Outdoor : 5,600K,
Indoor : 3,200K) (Selected from camera menu)
Adjustment range 2,800K to 8,000K
5-11 Digital features function Fader, Effects, Multi-screen modes
Fader : Linked to Start/Stop button. Can be used 1 time when Fade mode displayed.
(Mode indication goes out when Fader ends.)
Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF.
Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until
mode is turned OFF.
Card mix : Mixes and displays included sample images, images recorded on cards and mo-
tion video.
5-11-1 Fader (Only in recording on tape) Audio synchronized fader
Auto Fade (Japanese model : Fade to white, Overseas model:Fade to black), Wipe, Corner Wipe,
Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
Fade time Approx. 4 seconds.
5-11-2 Effects Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror (Only Black and
White in card recording mode)
Effect function turned ON/OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation
29
MVX3i E
5-11-3 Multi-screen (Not available in Night mode)

Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames)
In Slow shutter 1/12.5 : Fast (4 frames), Normal (8 frames), Slow (12 frames)
In Slow shutter 1/8 : Fast (8 frames), Normal (16 frames), Slow (24 frames)
5-11-4 Availability in operation mode
Camera Card / Camera
Motion video Still image Motion video Still image
Digital Fader ● × × ×
Digital Effect ● ● Black and White only Black and White only
Multi-screen ● ● × ×
Card Mix (Title Mix) ● ● × ×
5-12 Built-in microphone Stereo using electret condenser microphone

Stereo sound created using non-directional microphone × 2 + Electric circuit
5-12-1 Wind screen function Supported With ON/OFF switch (Selected from menu. However, built-in microphone only.)
5-13 Built-in flash shooting Light adjustment system using preliminary flash
5-13-1 Strobe mode Auto strobe, Auto strobe with red eye suppression (white LED lighting), forced strobe, strobe
Off (The setting cannot be switched when the exposure is locked.)
5-13-2 Shutter speed In forced strobe mode, strobe emitted at 1/1000 sec and slower (switches to 1/1000 sec when set
to 1/2000) ··· In tape mode
Strobe emitted at 1/500 sec and slower ··· In card mode
5-13-3 Guide numbers 5.5
5-13-4 Shooting distance Approx. 1 to 2 m (During tape mode and card mode)
5-13-5 Charge time Approx. 5 second
5-14 Card Mix (Only in camera mode)
Mix type Card Chroma Key, Card Lumi. Key, Camera Chroma Key, Card Animation
Mix level adjustment 32 levels
Card Animation 3 types : Corner Animation, Straight Animation and Random Animation (Card Animations are
already recorded in the supplied SD Memory Card SDC-8M.)
5-15 Other additional functions
5-15-1 Time code Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 7:59:59) and records in sub-code area.
5-15-2 Data code The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be dis-
played during playback.
Time and date Automatic calendar range:January 1, 2003 through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is
January 1, 2003) World clock capability (select the name of your destination city and the date
and time are automatically adjusted to the local date and time.) Supports daylight savings time.
During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, or
time only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990 through December 31, 2089.)
Camera data Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded (but not displayed during recording),
and can be displayed during playback.
5-15-3 Accessory shoe Compatible with Advanced Accessory Shoe (VFL-1, DM-50, and VL-3 cordless connection)
5-15-4 REC Search mechanism Supported. Tape can be played (forward or reverse) by pressing the REC Search button while
camera recording is paused. (When REC Search ends, the camera recording is paused again.)
5-15-5 REC Review function Supported. Accessed by operating the Recording Check button when camera recording is paused.
5-15-6 Zero Set Memory Supported. This function allows you to rewind or fast-forward the tape to the position where the
WL-D81 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0:00:00). (During record-
ing, only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.)
5-15-7 Remote control reception ON/ OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (through menu selection). When
operating WL-D81, this takes approx. 2 seconds.
5-15-8 Headphone volume adjustment Possible. Adjustable by Select / Set button.
5-15-9 AEB shooting In Card / Camera mode, recording is performed by automatically changing the exposure correc-
tion in ±0, –0.5, or +0.5 steps (Drive mode : when AEB is selected).
Flash shooting is disabled.
5-15-10 Microphone attenuation Supported. Attenuation of 20 dB is applied to the built-in and external microphone.
30
MVX3i E
5-15-11 Microphone level meter Supported. This monitors the microphone level, and the microphone sensitivity can be adjusted
by selecting Manual for the microphone level (press the Control button and then adjust so that
the level meter displays approximately -12 dB.) When used in combination with microphone
attenuation, loud sounds can be recorded without distortion.
Microphone level When set to Auto :
The microphone sensitivity increases

When set to Manual : when the green bar is moved to the right
side.
6 Recorder
6-1 Recording functions Camera shooting and recording, DV input recording, analog input recording
6-1-1 Recording format Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
6-1-2 Tape speed Approx. 18.83 mm / second (in SP mode) , Approx. 12.57 mm / second (in LP mode)
6-1-3 DV input recording Complies with IEEE1394
Records video / audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable.
6-1-4 Analog input recording Records analog video / audio signals using an S-Video terminal and AV mini terminal.
6-1-5 Priority of terminals during recording DV terminal > S-Video terminal > AV mini terminal
6-2 Insert Recording Possible.
6-2-1 Insert-capable tapes SP recording only with tape to be inserted.
6-3 Audio Dubbing Recording Possible. (SD spec tapes only)
6-3-1 Audio Dubbing- capable tapes Only tapes with 12- bit / SP recording (other than 4-channel simultaneous recording) can be used
in Audio Dubbing Recording.
6-3-2 Audio dubbing signal input Audio signal from LINE (AV mini terminal) or microphone (external > internal).
6-3-3 Switching To Audio Dubbing Press audio dubbing button on the remote control while Playback is paused.
6-4 Playback functions Standard Playback and Superb Playback
6-4-1 Standard Playback
a. Video Video recorded in SP and LP modes
b. Audio 16-bit Supports the following sampling frequencies : 48 KHz, 44.1 KHz, 32 KHz.
12-bit Sampling frequency : 32 KHz
Stereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (variable mix ratio)
6-4-2 Superb Playback Plays video only
a. Still image playback Pure frame playback
b. Fast-forward playback Approx. 11.5× speed.
c. Rewind playback Approx. 11.5× speed.
d. Frame playback Forward/reverse frame feeding
e. Slow playback Forward/reverse 1/3× speed
f. 1× SP playback Forward/reverse 1× speed
g. 2× SP playback Forward/reverse 2× speed
h. Edit search Forward/reverse 1× speed
6-5 Tape fast-forward/rewind time Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds. (using 60-minute tape)
6-6 Input signals
6-6-1 DV terminal SD format signals complying with IEEE1394– AV / C protocol
6-6-2 AV mini terminal
a. Video signals PAL standard color video signals
Impedance 75 Ω
Signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio signals
Types of signals Stereo audio signal
Impedance Min. 40 KΩ
Signal level −10 dBv
6-6-3 S Video terminal
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal
Impedance 75 Ω
Signal level 0.286Vp-p (color burst signal)
6-6-4 Microphone terminal φ 3.5 mm mini stereo jack
Impedance Min. 5 KΩ
Level −57 dBv (When using 600 Ω microphone)
During microphone attenuation −37 dBv (When using 600 Ω microphone)
6-6-5 USB port USB 2.0 compatible
31
MVX3i E
6-7 Output signals

6-7-1 DV terminal Complies with IEEE1394– AV / C protocol
6-7-2 AV mini terminal φ 3.5 mm 4-pin mini-jack
a. Video signals
Signal configuration PAL standard color video signals
Output impedance 75 Ω
Output signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
Horizontal resolution
Self recording / playback Approx. 540 TV lines (Screen center)
Camera EE out Max. Approx. 540 TV lines (Screen center)
Catalog value: Approx. 540 TV lines (Screen center)
b. Audio signals
Types of signals Stereo audio signal
Output impedance Max. 3 KΩ
Output signal level −10 dBv (with 47 KΩ load)
Frequency characteristic 60 Hz to 16 KHz (Range between 1 KHz standard ±3 dB)
Audio signal S/N
During microphone input Min. 48dB
During external microphone input Min. 48dB
6-7-3 S-video terminal
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal
Video signal 1 Vp- p (brightness + synchronization signal)
Color signal 0.3 Vp- p (color burst signal)
Brightness signal S/N Min. 45dB
Horizontal resolution
Self recording / playback Conforming to camera EE out
Camera EE OUT Max. Approx. 540 TV lines (Screen center)
Catalog value: Approx. 540 TV lines (Screen center)
6-7-4 Headphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Output impedance 47Ω
Output signal level −25dBv (with 16Ω load at max. volume)
6-7-5 USB port Complies with USB 2.0
USB device class Independent class, TPT class, mass storage class, audio class, and video class
Compatible computer systems Windows systems : IBM PC/AT compatible
Macintosh systems : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook
Computer operating system Windows systems : Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP
Macintosh systems : Mac OS 9 or later
6-8 Memory card system
6-8-1 Types of memory cards used Multimedia card, SD memory card.
6-8-2 Recordable images types
Still image JPEG recording
In Camera mode If “Card ” is selected in the Photo Record menu, the user can use the Photo button to record
a still image to the memory card while recording a motion video to the tape (Tape simultaneous
recording function : VGA still image).
In Card Recording mode Still image is recorded using the Photo button (image size and image quality are selectable).
Writing in Progress warning is displayed in the EVF/LCD.
In VCR mode Still image is recorded using the Photo button during tape playback (pressed halfway down for
still image playback and pressed all the way down for recording). Also, DV input images (when
no tape loaded or loaded tape is stopped) can be recorded by pressing the Photo button (pressing
halfway captures still image of the DV input, pressing all the way records the image).
Image quality in recording onto card from tape, DV input, and AV input (still image)
Source Source recording system Image recorded on card

Tape / DV input Progressive or frame video recording Progressive or frame image
Tape / DV input Normal motion video recording Simple pure frame image
Analog AV input Normal motion video recording Field image
Motion video MPEG-4 + audio (monaural) recording

Records only camera images during Card Record mode and from tape during VCR mode (re-
cording from DV input, AV input and S-Video input is disabled).
32
MVX3i E
6-8-3 File name and folder name Based on the DCF (Design rule for Camera File systems) and still image (Exif 2.2) file manage-
ment specifications / DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications, the
following names are assigned to recorded cards after formatting in the Format menu.
Motion videos follow the SD_VIDEO rules.
Card volume label CANON DV
Types of file Compression system Folder name and file name

Still image (Exif 2.2) file JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG
Movie video file MPEG-4 //SD_VIDEO/PRLxxx/MOLyyy.ASF
Motion video thumbnail file *1 JPEG //SD_VIDEO/PRLxxx/MOLyyy.THM
Photo stitch JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/STz_yyyy.JPG
Zoom browser JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG
DPOF file TEXT //MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK
Work file TEXT //DCIM/CANONMSC/xxx.tmp
xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File No., z : A to Z

(*1) Comes from motion video file of same file No. DCF folder and file name//DCIM/xxxCANON/
AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx : Folder No.,yyyy : File No.
File No. Files are managed internally by folder No.and file No.
Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders
(100 files to a folder).
Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998.
Motion videos are recorded using the file numbers 001 to 999 and folder numbers 001 to 999.
Playback supports hexadecimal numbers from 001 to FFF.
Relationship between folder numbers and file numbers
Folder No. File No. Saved files

100 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100 Sample images included at time of shipping
101 0101 0102 0103 ････ 0199 0200
102 0201 0202 0203 ････ 0299 0300
･･･
198 9801 9802 9803 ････ 9899 9900 Photographed image recording area
200 0001 0002 0003 ････ 0099 0100
･･･
998 9801 9802 9803 ････ 9899 9900
Photographed images start from 101-0101 and are basically numbered to be greater than Direc-
tory No.-File No. of files saved on MutiMediaCards. Motion videos start from 001-101.
6-8-4 Recording image size/Image quality
Still image recording in tape simultaneous
recording 640 × 480 (VGA) / Normal only
In card / camera mode 1632 × 1224, 1280 × 960, 640 × 480(VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and Normal
In copy recording 640 × 480 (VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and Normal
Motion video recording (MPEG-4) 352 × 288, 176 × 144 12.5 frame / sec
6-8-5 Number of recorded images (When using SDC-8M)
Still image recording 1632 × 1224 1280 × 960 640 × 480
Super Fine mode Approx. 3 (approx. 1360KB) Approx. 5 (approx. 850KB) Approx. 34 (approx. 175KB)
Fine mode Approx. 5 (approx. 880KB) Approx. 9 (approx. 550KB) Approx. 50 (approx. 120KB)
Normal mode Approx. 10 (approx. 480KB) Approx. 16 (approx. 300KB) Approx. 84 (approx. 65KB)
Motion video recording 352 × 288 176 × 144
Maximum recording time Approx. 2 minutes Approx. 6 minutes
Data size for maximum recording time Approx. 6 MB Approx. 6 MB
Data size per second Approx. 48 KB / sec Approx. 16 KB / sec
* The included SDC-8M contains prerecorded title images, therefore the actual number of re-
corded images will be less than above.
* The given number of recorded images is only for reference. The number will vary greatly
depending on the focal length, subject and other conditions when taking pictures.
33
MVX3i E
6-8-6 Still image Number of frames per continuous image recording and number of images that can be recorded in a session
Size Image Quality Built-in flash Speed Frames Remark

Super Fine
Not installed. (when Approx. 2 Up to 10 Using Toshiba SD (64MB)
Fine
not activated) frame/sec frames card.
1632 × Normal
1224 Super Fine
When flash is Approx. 2 Up to 10 1/4 max. flash luminosity per
Fine
activated frame/sec frames single shooting.
Normal
Super Fine
Fine
1280 × Normal
960 Super Fine
Fine
Normal
Super Fine
Fine
Normal
640 × 480
Super Fine
Fine
Normal
6-8-7 Card format Formats using format command in the main unit menu. Operation is not guaranteed with PC
formats as problems can occur with some OS.
6-9 Digital feature playback function Fader, Effect, Multi-screen modes
Fader : Linked to Start/Stop button. Can be used 1 time when Fade mode displayed.
(Mode indication goes out when Fader ends.)
Effect : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF.
Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until
mode is turned OFF.
6-9-1 Fader Audio synchronized Fader. Same Auto Fade as in recording mode (Japanese models : Fade to white,
Overseas models : Fade to black), Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
Fade time Approx. 4 seconds
6-9-2 Effects Same as in recording mode. Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color
Mask, Mirror
Effect function turned ON/OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation
6-9-3 Multi-screen
Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames)
6-9-4 Card mix Not available
6-9-5 Availability in operation modes
Playback (VCR/Tape) Card playback (VCR/Card)
Fader
Effects
Multi-screen
Card Mix
6-10 Direct print Still images recorded on memory cards can be easily printed on separately sold card photo print-
ers (CP-10/100/200/300), printers with direct print support (BJ 895PD, BJ 35PD, BJ F890PD,
PIXUS 50i), or PictBridge compatible printers by operation from the video camera. DPOF print
setup support (max. 200 images).
6-10-1 Printable images Only still images recorded on the SD memory card and MultiMediaCard.
6-10-2 Print format Single image/8-image (same image printed 8 segments on card-size paper) prints. Printing not
available from index screen.
6-10-3 Trimming Possible. Areas enclosed in trimming frame can be enlarged (approx. 2 ×) and printed. Size of
trimming frame is user-adjustable. (H × W ratio is fixed.)
The position of the trimming frame is moved by joystick operation, and the size of the trimming
frame is adjusted by the Zoom button.
34
MVX3i E
6-10-4 Date display Possible. (when connected to PictBridge compatible printer).

6-10-5 Number of print copies Easy Print : 1 to 9 sheets
DPOF printing : Max. 200 images, 1 to 99 each
6-10-6 Print systems
Printer specifications
Print Printer Suitable when connected to
MVX3i E Print settings Style/paper setup screen
manufacturer specifications printer
(Controlled at printer side)
STYLE
Canon CP CP-10/CP-100 CP specifications L SIZE
BORDER
specifications LESS
only STILE Image
TRIMMING
1 COPIES Standard
PRINT CANCEL
MENU
STYLE
CP CP-200/300 CP specifications L SIZE
BORDER
specifications LESS
+ STILE Image
PictBridge TRIMMING
specifications 1 COPIES Standard
PRINT CANCEL
MENU
STYLE
BJ Photo BJ-895PD/ BJ Photo L SIZE
BORDER
specifications 535PD/ specifications LESS
PAPER
only F890PC, STILE
PIXUS 50i TRIMMING
1 COPIES
CARD#1
PRINT CANCEL
MENU
PAPER
BJ Photo PictBridge DEFAULT
DEFAULT
specifications specifications
BORDER -
+ LESS
PictBridge TRIMMING PAPER
PAPERSIZE DEFAULT
specifications 1 COPIES OFF PAPERTYPE DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDERLESS
PRINT CANCEL
MENU
PAPER
Other PictBridge PictBridge DEFAULT
manufacturer specifications specifications DEFAULT

BORDER
only
TRIMMING PAPER
PAPERSIZE DEFAULT
1 COPIES ON PAPERTYPE DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDER
PRINT CANCEL
MENU
6-11 Other functions

6-11-1 Consecutive shooting mechanism Can be used starting in Recording Pause or Stop mode, or starting with the power off. This does
not apply to cases where the cassette has been removed.
6-11-2 Automatic stop function When still image forward playback is continues for approx. 5 min or reverse playback is contin-
ues for approx. 5 min.
When a condensation warning is displayed. When the tape end or beginning is reached.
6-11-3 Power automatic stop function This function is activated in the following cases : When Recording Pause continues for approx.
5 min. When the battery voltage falls below a specified value.
6-11-4 Time code Automatically written during recording. Time code values range from 0:00:00:00 to 7:59:59:24
(hours : minutes : seconds : frames)
6-11-5 Photo search This function searches for images shot in Photo mode.
Forward/reverse photo search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Photo
Search with the remote control Search Select key)
Values can be entered in a range of up to the 10th photo from the current position.
6-11-6 Date search If there is more than one recording date, this function cue up to the position where the date changes.
Forward/reverse date search (use the / keys on the remote control after selecting Date
Search with the remote control Search Select key)
Values can be entered in a range of up to the 10th photo from the current position.
6-11-7 World clock display Set reference city (city of clock time setting) and select name of city when shooting. Date and
time are automatically adjusted to local date and time, and recorded in data code.
6-11-8 Speaker Built-in speaker, with volume adjustment
35
MVX3i E
6-11-9 Battery charge function Possible. Battery pack can be charged by mounting in attachment position and using Canon
compact power adapter CA-570. (While charging, charge lamp flickers [single flicker when 0 to
approx. 75% charged, double flicker when 75 to approx. 95% charged] and lights solidly [95%
or more charged, changing completed].)
Charging time (Power supply witch in OFF position)
BP-511/512 : Approx. 120 min., BP-522 : Approx. 210 min., BP-535: Approx. 310 min.
6-11-10 Still image simultaneous If the Photo button is pressed while recording a motion video to tape, a still image can be
recording during recording to tape recorded to the memory card at an image size of 640 × 480 and at Normal mode quality.
6-11-11 File transfer USB file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (MPEG-4 files) recorded on memory cards can be
uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) on the PC can be downloaded to memory cards in
the camera by connecting the included IFC-300PCU interface cable between a USB port on the
PC and the USB port of the camera.
DV file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (MPEG-4 files) recorded on memory cards can be
uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) and motion video (MPEG-4) on the PC can be
downloaded to memory cards in the camera by connecting a CV-150F (or CV-250F) DV cable
between an IEEE1394 port on the PC and the DV terminal of the camera.
6-11-12 Analog/Digital conversion Converts analog AV signals input to the AV terminal into digital DV signals in real-time and
outputs the digital DV signals from the DV terminal. Images played back from 8 mm tapes and
VHS tapes can be uploaded to a PC by connecting an AV cable between the tape deck and VHS
video, and this camera and a DV cable between this camera and a PC. (Turn on the [AV input →
DV output] in the VCR setting on the VCR menu.)
6-11-13 Playback zoom During tape or card playback (not available for motion video), the played back image can be
enlarged up to approx. 5× by pressing the zoom lever to the telephoto end. (The first time the
playback zoom is operated, the image is enlarged by 2×. After that, zooming changes between 1×
and 5× as the zoom lever is operated.) To cancel the playback zoom, hold the zoom lever to the
wide end until the frame display disappears.
Enlarged section during enlarged screen view can be changed by joystick operation (the enlarged
section on the LCD monitor is shown by frame indicators).
7 Terminal
7-1 DV terminal Special 4-pin (Complies with IEEE1394) Serves for both input and output
7-2 S-video terminal 4-pin mini-DIN, Serves for both input and output
7-3 AV (video/audio) terminal φ 3.5 mm 4-pin jack (yellow) input / output
7-4 External microphone input terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
7-5 Headphone terminal φ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack
7-6 USB port mini-B Receptacle
7-7 Memory card connection terminal Special multi-pin
7-8 Battery terminal Special 4-pin
7-9 DC input terminal φ 3.4mm jack
8 Power supply
8-1 Input power supply 7.4V DC (Battery pack), 8.4V DC (DC IN)
8-2 Power consumption During shooting: Approx. 4.5 W (When using CVF), Approx. 5.7 W (When using LCD monitor)
During shooting: Approx. 4.3 W (When using LCD monitor)
9 Dimensions (W × H × D) 80 × 90 × 201 mm (3.2 × 3.5 × 7.9 in) (Projections excluded)
10 Weight
10-1 Body Approx. 725 g (approx. 1.6 lb)
10-2 Total equipped weight Approx. 830 g (approx. 1.8 lb) (including BP-512, DVM-E30, lens caps, hood, lithium battery, SDC-8M)
11 Temperature and humidity requirements
11-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance
0°C to 40°C, 85% relative humidity
11-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation
−5°C to 45°C, 65% relative humidity
36
MVX3i E
4. System Diagram (Common to all Models)
WS-20 Wrist Strap

WD-H46 Wide- BP-500 Series
converter Battery Pack CG-570
Battery Charger
SS-600 Shoulder Strap
CB-570 Car Battery Cable

TL-H46 Tele-
converter MiniDV
Video
Cassette CA-570 Compact
Power Adapter
WL-D81 Wireless
Controller
FS-H46U
Filter Set
CA-570 Compact
Power Adapter
BP-500 Series
Battery Pack
VFL-1 Video Flash Light
S-150 S-video Cable
TV
PC-A10 SCAR
T
VL-3 Video Light Adapter
STV-250N
Stereo Video Cable
VCR
DM-50 Directional
Stereo Microphone CV-150F/CV-250F DV Cable
Digital Device
SDC-128M PC Card Adapter

SD Memory Card
BP-900 Series USB Reader/W riter
VL-10Li Battery
Battery Pack
Video Light
Stereo Microphone MultiMediaCard
(commercially available)
IFC-300PCU USB Cable Computer
SC-1000 Soft
Carrying Case Canon printers with direct print function/
PictBridge-compliant printers
Fig. 2
37
MVX3i E
5. Overview of Viewfinder / LCD Panel Displays
5-1 Camera Mode
MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Camera mode
ON
40 12 0
M
Zoom bar display

(Displayed for about four seconds
after the zoom operation)
Optical Zoom W T
40×/ 36× digital zoom W T 40× : Tape, 36× : Card

200× digital zoom W T The recording only
Zooming is stopped W T
Zooming to telephoto end W T
Zooming to wide end W T
Exposure correction bar display

Minimum correction : -11 level
Correction default setting
Maximum correction : +11 level

Displayed by correctable range
No display No function
Image stabilizer display

The image stabilizer is ON
The image stabilizer is OFF No display
Recording mode display

SP recording
LP recording
38
MVX3i E

Operating mode display
During recording
During Recording Pause
Playback is stopped
Cassette is ejected
+ REC Search
- REC Search
Program AE mode display

Full Auto mode is selected Always displayed
Auto mode is selected A Displayed for approx. 4 seconds
and then turns OFF.
Tv mode is selected 1/2000 sec
1/2 sec
Av mode is selected
When iris is completely closed

Spotlight mode is selected
Surf & Snow mode is selected After displayed for 4 seconds,
Night mode is selected only characters are displayed.
Super Night mode is selected
Tape counter display

Time code display
Not entered
Zero set memory M
Not entered M
BLC correction display

Correction
No correction No display
39
MVX3i E

EXP lock display
Minimum exposure value
Default setting
Maximum exposure value

During Full Auto No display
Timer display
During recording
Self-timer is activated
Remaining tape display
Tape end
Not entered
Tape warning display Flashes red
Other No display
Remaining battery level display Approx. 100% remaining

Approx. 75% remaining
Approx. 0% remaining,
warning display (flashes red)
Power adapter is attached No display
Focus mode display

AF is set to OFF
AF is set to ON No display
Set to infinity
40
MVX3i E

Lithium coin battery warning Flashes red
Condensation warning display Flashes red
Remote control code display

Code setting 1 is selected
Code setting 2 is selected
Remote controller receive OFF is selected
White balance display

Set
Indoor presets
Outdoor presets
Auto No display
Wind screen display

Wind screen is turned ON
Wind screen is turned OFF No display External microphone is connected
Attenuation display
Attenuation is turned ON
Attenuation is turned OFF No display
Both Wind screen and Attenuation are
turned ON
Card Mix display
Audio mode display

12-bit
16-bit
41
MVX3i E

Digital feature display
Auto Fade is selected
Wipe is selected
Corner Wipe is selected
Jump is selected
Flip is selected
Puzzle is selected
Zigzag is selected
Beam is selected
Tide is selected
Art is selected
Black and White is selected
Sepia is selected
Mosaic is selected
Ball is selected
Cube is selected
Wave is selected
Color Mask is selected
Mirror is selected
Multi-screen is selected
Digital effects are turned OFF No display
Digital feature menu
42
MVX3i E
Digital feature selection

Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button in Camera mode.
The line where the cursor is located in the menu is displayed with a turquoise background.
The previously selected items and the corresponding settings are shown in yellow.
OFF
In Fader Selection
In Effect Selection
In Multi Screen Selection In Multi Screen Speed Selection
In Multi Screen Count Selection
43
MVX3i E

Area Summer time display
Time and date is not set
Custom key display

Image Stabilizer is selected CK
Backlight correction is selected CK
Zebra pattern is selected CK
16:9 mode display

16:9 mode is selected
Other No display
Photo half-pressed lock display

AF/AE operation in progress Flash
After AF/AE lock Green light
Strobe indicator
(during VFL-1 connection)
Auto-strobe is selected
Red-eye suppression auto-strobe is selected
Manual strobe ON is selected
Manual strobe OFF is selected
Photo/Card information display

Regular recording No display
Tape is selected
Card is selected
Microphone level display

Auto Level is selected
-db 40 12 0
Audio Level is turned ON
Audio Level is turned OFF No display
Manual Level is selected
-db 40 12 0
Audio Level is turned ON M Level can be set
-db 40 12 0
Audio Level is turned OFF M Level cannot be set
44
MVX3i E
5-2 VCR Mode

VCR mode
ON
-db 40 12 0
Audio 12-bit output display

12-bit Stereo 1 is selected
12-bit Stereo 2 is selected
12-bit Mix 1:1 is selected
12-bit Mix Variable is selected
16-bit is selected No display
Mix balance display

Mix ratio 1:0
Mix ratio 1:1
Mix ratio 0:1
Recording mode display

SP recording
LP recording

During recording Red display
During recording pause
Cassette is ejected
Playback is stopped
Playback
Fast forward
Rewind
No tape
Fast playback
2× speed playback
1× speed playback
Slow playback
Frame playback
Still image playback
Still image reverse playback
Frame reverse playback
45
MVX3i E

Slow reverse playback
1× SP reverse playback
2× SP reverse playback
Rewind playback
Forward edit search
Reverse edit search
Forward data/photo search
Reverse data/photo search
FF return
REW return
AV Insert pause
AV Insert recording
Audio dubbing pause
Audio dubbing recording Red display
Tape counter
Time code display
Not entered
Zero Set Memory Same as during Camera mode
Remaining tape display Same as during Camera mode
Audio dubbing /
Insert or search operation display
AV insert is selected
Audio dubbing is selected
Data search operation
Still image photo search operation
Other than search No display
Remaining battery level display Same as during camera mode
Lithium coin battery Warning indicator Same as during camera mode
Condensation warning display Same as during camera mode
46
MVX3i E

Remote control code display Same as during camera mode
Wind screen display Same as during camera mode
Digital feature display Same as during camera mode
Audio mode display Same as during camera mode
Audio input display

Audio input terminal is selected
Microphone terminal is selected
Microphone attenuation display

Microphone attenuation ON is selected
Microphone attenuation OFF is selected No display
Data code display Same as during camera mode
16:9 mode indicator
DV input indicator
Speaker/Headphone volume
adjustment display
Speaker is selected
Volume OFF
When Headphone is selected Same as during camera mode
Playback zoom display
Microphone input level adjustment Same as during camera mode
47
MVX3i E

Data code display
Data code setting
Date and time Camera data Date and time & camera data
Date
Date and time selection

setting
Time
setting
Date &
time
setting
Camera data
Aperture value display This product´s aperture value is
from F1.8
Aperture fully close There is no aperture Fully Close

function in this product
Not entered
Shutter speed display
Not entered
Time display
Time setting is selected
Not entered
Time and time setting are selected
Not entered
Data display
Not entered
Windscreen display Same as during camera mode
48
MVX3i E

Audio info display
Audio dubbing/audio input terminal
is selected
Audio dubbing/microphone input
terminal is selected
Audio mode display Same as during camera mode
16:9 mode display Same as during camera mode
DV input display
During DV input
AV DV signal conversion is selected
Other No display
49
MVX3i E
5-3 Card/Camera Mode

Card/Camera mode
Zoom/Exposure correction/ND display

Zoom, Exposure correction display Same as during camera mode
(except that Digital zoom is 40× only)
Overexposure warning (flashes) Caution is indicated when F11 or higher
ND display (during ND ON)
Underexposure (flashes)
Image stabilizer display Same as during Camera mode
Drive mode setting indicator

When Continuous Shooting mode
is selected
When AEB mode is selected
When Single Shot mode is selected No display
Card recording quality display
Program AE mode display Same as during Camera mode
Stitch Assist quantity display Clockwise

Counter-clockwise
Card access display Writing and reading
Card remaining display

No card (flashes red)
9999 or more images can be recorded
99 images can be recorded
5 images can be recorded

Yellow display
1 image can be recorded
50
MVX3i E

EXP lock display Same as during Camera/Tape mode
Card motion video recording time display

352 × 288 is selected
Still image size display

Focus mode display Same as during Camera mode
Self-timer display Same as during Camera mode
Motion video size display

Remaining battery level display Same as during Camera mode
White balance display Same as during Camera mode
Coin battery low power warning display Same as during Camera mode
Condensation warning display Same as during Camera mode
Remote control code display Same as during Camera mode
Headphone volume adjustment display Same as during Camera mode
Digital feature display
Time and date display Same as during Camera mode

(date and time only)
Photo half-pressed lock display Same as during Camera mode
51
MVX3i E

Strobe display
Auto-strobe is selected
Red-eye suppression auto-strobe is selected
Manual strobe ON is selected
Manual strobe OFF is selected
Stitch Assist operation guide
52
MVX3i E
5-4 Card Playback Mode

Card Playback mode (Still images)
Slideshow display
Print mark display
Protect mark display
DCF file name display

Directory Number-File Number

Playback
Playback pause
Card access display
Image number display

No card Red flashing display
Checking number of images recorded
on card
0 recorded images
9th of 99 recorded images Green display
99th of 99 recorded images
Speaker/headphone volume adjustment Same as during VCR mode
Data code display Same as during VCR mode

53
MVX3i E

Playback zoom operation guide display Same as during VCR playback mode
Slideshow operation guide display

During slideshow execution
Card Playback mode

(Motion video (Motion JPEG))
Slideshow display
Motion video playback time display

Playback
Playback pause
Card information display

No card Red flashing display
Checking number of images recorded
on card
0 recorded images
Speaker/headphone volume adjustment Same as during VCR mode
Data code display Same as during VCR mode

Guide display
54
MVX3i E

Card playback mode
(Motion video (MPEG-4))
Slideshow guide display
Guide display
Playback standby status
Playback
Playback pause
TTL (hour:minutes:seconds)
LAP (hour:minutes:seconds)
55
MVX3i E
5-5 Menu Display

The menu display has Camera mode, VCR mode, Card/Camera mode, and Card Playback mode.
Camera Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP
CARD MIX Switches to Card mix selection screen
CAMERA SET UP D. ZOOM OFF 40× Lithium battery

40×
200×
IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
WHIT BAL. AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
AF AST LAMP ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
16 : 9 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
PHOTO REC TAPE TAPE Lithium battery
CARD
ZEBRA ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
BLC ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery
LP
RETURN
AUDIO SET UP WIND SCREEN ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
MIC ATT ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
MIC LEVEL AUTO AUTO
MANUAL
AUDIO MODE 16 bit 12 bit Lithium battery
12 bit
VOLUME Lithium battery
RETURN
56
MVX3i E
DISPLAY SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
LCD MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D/T DISPLAY *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
LANGUAGE *3 ENGLISH ENGLISH Lithium battery
中文
DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM CUSTOM KEY OFF OFF Lithium battery
IMAGE S.
BLC
ZEBRA
WL. REMOTE *2 Lithium battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON PARIS Lithium battery
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
57
MVX3i E
SYSTEM D/TIME SEL *2 1. JAN. 2003 1. JAN. 2003 Lithium battery

12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
MY CAMERA S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
SHTR SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
OPER. SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
SELF-T SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
RETURN
CLOSE MENU
*1 : In normal screens other than the menu screen, information for BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, LCD MIRROR, and D/T DIS-
PLAY is not displayed.
*2 : In normal screens other than the menu screen, these are displayed after the power is turned on and for only four
seconds after exiting the menu.
The D/TIME SEL is displayed only when the D/T DISPLAY is turned off. Also, OFF ( ) in the WL REMOTE is
constantly displayed.
*3 : When “Chinese” is selected, the characters displayed in the viewfinder and LCD monitor change to “Chinese: Simpli-
fied”.
58
MVX3i E
VCR Mode
VCR SET UP REC MODE *4 SP SP Lithium battery

LP
AV DV OUT *4 ON OFF Reset by turning
OFF power off
RETURN
AUDIO SET UP OUTPUT CH *1 L/R L/R Reset by turning
L/L power off
R/R
AUDIO DUB. *4 AUDIO IN AUDIO IN Lithium battery
MIC. IN
WIND SCREEN ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
MIC LEVEL AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
MANUAL
AUDIO MODE *4 16bit 12bit Lithium battery
12bit
RETURN
CARD SET UP *2 SI QUALITY SUPER FINE FINE Lithium battery
FINE
NORMAL
MOVIE SIZE 352 × 288 352 × 288 Lithium battery
176 × 144
IMAGE NOS. RESET CONTINUOUS Lithium battery
CONTINUOUS
RETURN
CARD OPERATION *2 COPY [ ] ] Switches to copy execution screen
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
DISPLAYS ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
6 SEC. DATE *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
DATA CODE *2 DATE/TIME DATE/TIME Lithium battery
CAMERA DATA
CAM. & D/T
D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE *2 Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
OFF
59
MVX3i E
SYSTEM T. ZONE/DST *3 LONDON PARIS Lithium battery

LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *3 1. JAN. 2003 1. JAN. 2003 Lithium battery
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
RETURN
CLOSE MENU
60
MVX3i E
*1 : In normal screens other than the menu screen, information for the BRIGHTNESS, 6 SEC. DATE, OUTPUT CH, and
BEEP are not displayed.
*2 : In normal screens other than the menu screen, the DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on.
seconds after exiting the menu. The D/TIME SEL is displayed only when the D/T DISPLAY is turned off.
*4 : PAL model has no functions (no menu items).
61
MVX3i E
Card / Camera Mode
CAMMERA SET UP D. ZOOM OFF OFF Lithium battery

36×
IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
WHIT BAL. AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
DRIVE MODE CONT. SINGLE Lithium battery
AEB
SINGLE
AF AST LAMP AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
OFF
FOCUS PRI. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
ND AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
OFF
ZEBRA ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
BLC ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
CARD SET UP SI QUALITY SUPER FINE FINE Lithium battery
FINE
NORMAL
SI SIZE 1632 × 1224 1632 × 1224 Lithium battery
1280 × 960
640 × 480
MOVIE SIZE 352 × 288 352 × 288 Lithium battery
176 × 144
FILE NOS. RESET CONTINUOS Lithium battery
CONTINUOS
RETURN
LP
RETURN
AUDIO SET UP WIND SCREEN ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
VOLUME Lithium battery
RETURN
DISPLAY SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
LCD MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
62
MVX3i E
DISPLAY SET UP D/T DISPLAY *1 ON OFF Lithium battery

OFF
DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM CUSTOM KEY OFF OFF Lithium battery
IMAGE S.
BLC
ZEBRA
WL. REMOTE *2 Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
OFF
T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON PARIS Lithium battery
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
63
MVX3i E
MY CAMERA SHTR SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
RETURN
CLOSE MENU
*1 : In normal screens other than the menu screen, the BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, D/T DISPLAY, FILE NOS., and SHTR
SOUND are not displayed.
seconds after exiting the menu.
The D/TIME SEL is displayed only when the D/T DISPLAY is turned off. Also, OFF ( ) in the WL REMOTE is
constantly displayed.
64
MVX3i E
Card Playback Mode
CARD OPERATION COPY [ ] Switches to copy execution screen
PRINT ORDERS Switches to erase all print designations screen

ALL ERASE
IMAGE ERASE Switches to image protect screen
FORMAT Switches to format screen
RETURN
CARD OPERATION PROTECT Switches to image protect screen
(for Index screen)
PRINT ORDER Switches to print designations screen
RETURN
LP
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
DISPLAYS ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE *1 Lithium battery
OFF
OFF
OFF
65
MVX3i E
SYSTEM T. ZONE/DST *3 LONDON PARIS Lithium battery

LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
······
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
······
AZORES
AZORES
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
USB CONNECT AUTO SELECT AUTO SELECT
STANDARD
STORAGE
RETURN
MY CAMERA SEL. S-UP IMG NO IMAGE CANON LOGO Lithium battery
CANON LOGO
MY IMAGE1
MY IMAGE2
S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
66
MVX3i E
MY CAMERA SELF-T SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT
MY SOUND1
MY SOUND2
RETURN
PRINT *4 Switches to print designations screen (when Camera Direct compatible printer is connected)
CLOSE
*1: In normal screens other than the menu screen, information for the BRIGHTNESS and BEEP is not displayed.
*2: In normal screens other than the menu screen, the DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on.
*3: In normal screens other than the menu screen, these are displayed after the power is turned on and for only four
seconds after exiting the menu.The D/TIME SEL is displayed only when the D/T DISPLAY is turned off.
*4: Displayed only when Camera Direct compatible printer is connected.
67
MVX3i E
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
5-6 Card-Related Screen Displays

Slideshow screen
Still images (JPEG)
Motion video (MPEG-4)
Index screen
Still images (JPEG)
68
MVX3i E

Image protect screen
Still images (JPEG)
Print designations screen

Still images (JPEG)
Motion video (MPEG-4) No function
69
MVX3i E

Copy screen
Copy ( ) selection screen
Copy ( ) execution screen
Copy ( ) selection screen
Copy ( ) execution screen
70
MVX3i E

Image erase screen
Image erase selection screen
Erasing one image
Warning: Erasing in progress
Erasing all images
71
MVX3i E

Format screen
Format execution confirmation screen
Format execution screen
72
MVX3i E

Card mix selection screen
Mix type setting screen
Animation type setting screen
Mix level setting screen
73
MVX3i E

Stitch assist screen
My camera settings
My camera settings screen
Startup image selection screen
Shutter sound selection screen
74
MVX3i E

My camera settings
Startup sound selection screen
OPER. sound selection screen
Self-timer sound selection screen
PC connection screen
During USB connection
During IEEE1394 connection
75
MVX3i E
5-7 Direct Print Setting Screen
MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL

Direct print setting screen
Direct print setting initial screen
Print selection screen Camera Direct compatible printers PictBridge compatible printer
(CP-10/100/200/300, BJ)
L SIZE DEFAULT
BORDER DEFAULT
LESS
BORDER
STYLE LESS
TRIMMING TRIMMING PAPER
1 COPIES 1 COPIES ON
PRINT CANCEL PRINT CANCEL
Cancel print screen
Card #1 DEFAULT
Borderless DEFAULT
BORDER
LESS
Now printing (1/3) NOW PRINTING (1/3)
Stop STOP
Cancel selection screen
L SIZE DEFAULT
BORDER DEFAULT
LESS
BORDER
STYLE LESS
76
MVX3i E

Number of copies setting screen Camera Direct compatible printers PictBridge compatible printer
(CP-10/100/200/300, BJ)
L SIZE DEFAULT
BORDER DEFAULT
LESS
BORDER
STYLE LESS
* With BJ printers with Direct print function.
Trimming screen
CARD #1 DEFAULT
BORDER DEFAULT
LESS
BORDER
STYLE LESS
T W MENU
CARD #1 DEFAULT
BORDER DEFAULT
LESS
BORDER
STYLE LESS
* With BJ printers with Direct print function.
77
MVX3i E

Style setting Camera Direct compatible printers PictBridge compatible printer
Paper setting (CP-10/100/200/300, BJ)
STYLE PAPER
PAPER
PAPERSIZES DEFAULT
CARD#1 PAPERTYPES DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU MENU
STYLE PAPER
PAPER
CARD#1
PAPERSIZES DEFAULT
PAPERTYPES DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU MENU
STYLE PAPER
PAPER
CARD#2
PAPERSIZES CARD#2
PAPERTYPES DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU MENU
* BJ printers with Direct print function * Sizes that are supported by the
only. printer can be selected from among.
(DEFAULT, L, 2L, Postcard size,
Card size, 4" × 6", Letter, A4, Roll
L, Roll 2L, Roll A4, 5" × 7")
78
MVX3i E

Paper type setting (CP-10/100/200/300, BJ)
PAPER
PAPERSIZES CARD#1
PAPERTYPES DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU
PAPER
No function
PAPERSIZES CARD#1
PAPERTYPES DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU
PAPER
PAPERSIZES CARD#1
PAPERTYPES DEFAULT
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU
* Paper types that are support by the

selected paper size can be selected
from among.
(DEFAULT, Plain Paper, Photo Pa-
per, Fast Photo Paper)
79
MVX3i E

No border/With border setting (CP-10/100/200/300, BJ)
STYLE PAPER
Borders
PAPER SIZES CARD#1

BORDERLESS PAPER TYPES PLAIN PAPER
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU MENU
STYLE PAPER
BORDERS
PAPER SIZES CARD#1
PAPER TYPES PLAIN PAPER
BORDERLESS
BORDERS BORDERLESS
MENU MENU
STYLE PAPER
BORDERS
PAPER SIZES CARD#1
BORDERED PAPER TYPES PLAIN PAPER
BORDERS BORDERED
MENU MENU
Single screen/Divided screen setting

STYLE
Image
Standard
MENU
STYLE
Image
No function
Standard
MENU
STYLE
Image
Multiple * CP printers with Direct print function

MENU only.
80
MVX3i E
5-8 Print designations

Camera Direct compatible printers PictBridge compatible printer
(CP-10/100/200/300, BJ)
CARD#1 7 CARD#1
7
BORDERED ON PHOTO
STYLE PAPER BORDERED
PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES
OK CANCEL OK CANCEL
RESUME RESUME
Cancel print screen
9 CARD#1 7 CARD#1
BORDERED ON PHOTO
STYLE BORDERED
NOW PRINTING(1/9) NOW PRINTING(1/7)
STOP STOP
Restart print screen
CARD#1 7 CARD#1
7
BORDERED ON PHOTO
PRINT REMAININS IMAGES PRINT REMAININS IMAGES
OK CANCEL OK CANCEL
RESUME RESUME
Style/paper setting screen
CARD#1 7 CARD#1
7
BORDERED ON PHOTO
CHANGE PRINT STYLE CHANGE PAPER SET
OK CANCEL OK CANCEL
RESUME RESUME
* With BJ printers with Direct print
function.
81
MVX3i E
5-9 Warning Displays
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED

• When copy-protected tape is played.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED

• When copy protection information is detected during DV input or LINE input, or when the signal output from the television or
VCR is garbled during analog input.
SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME

• When the power is turned on without setting the area and/or time and date.
REMOVE THE CASSETTE

• When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.
CHECK THE DV INPUT

• When “REC” is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC, without a connection to DV input, or in a condition where the
connected DV input cannot be recognized.
CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK

• When the battery power is low.
CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED

• When condensation is detected (if a cassette is inserted, a “REMOVE THE CASSETTE” message appears).
THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

• When “REC” is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC in VCR mode, if the cassette is set for erasure prevention. In
Camera mode, when the power is turned ON, when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed, and when a cassette is inserted.
TAPE END
• When the tape end is detected, or when a key (FF, PLAY, etc.) which drives the tape forward is pressed in a mode that allows
transition to forward driving during the detection process.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]

• When the Audio Dubbing or AV Insert button is pressed at a tape position recorded in LP/ESP/ELP; or when LP mode is
detected during Audio Dubbing or AV Insert.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]

• When the Audio Dubbing button is pressed at a tape position with 16-bit or 4-channel simultaneous recording; or when 16-bit
mode or 4-channel simultaneous recording mode is detected during Audio Dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]

• When a blank tape area is detected during Audio Dubbing or AV Insert.
82
MVX3i E
HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE

• When a print head is clogged.
CARD ERROR
• When a card error occurs and data cannot be recorded on the card.
CARD FULL
• When the card is full.
NAMING ERROR
• When the file number or directory number is the maximum.
UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
• When an attempt is made to play an image in an unplayable format, an incompatible JPEG image, or an image with corrupt data.
THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE RECORDED

• When an analog input video cannot be recorded due to the signal state while recording to a memory card.
NO CARD
• When there is no card in the camcorder socket.
NO IMAGES
• When there are no images to be played in the card.
THE CARD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

• When an attempt is made to record on an SD card set for erasure prevention, in a mode that allows card recording (VCR mode,
Card Recording mode).
MEMORY CARD COVER IS OPEN

• When the cover of the memory card is open.
NOW CREATING START-UP IMAGE

• When the writing of the Startup screen to the flash memory is in progress.
PRINT ORDER ERROR

• When there are too many print marks (200 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.
NO PAPER
• When the paper cassette is not inserted correctly or when there is no paper in the paper cassette.
PAPER JAM
• When a paper jam occurs during printing.
83
MVX3i E
NO INK
• When an ink cassette is not inserted correctly or when the ink cassette is empty.
COMMUNICATION ERROR
• When an error occurs during communication.
COULD NOT PRINT * IMAGE

• When trying to use the * image DPOF settings to print a still image recorded by a different camcorder, a still image in a different
format, or a still image that was loaded to a computer and edited.
SET PRINT MARK

• When trying to use the PRINT command in the Card Playback menu to print a still image not designated for printing.
PRINTER IN USE
• When printing still images from a memory card inserted in a computer or printer. Once printing is completed, printing of the still
image set at the camcorder is automatically started.
PRINTER WARMING UP
• When the printer is warming up, printing starts automatically once the warming up operation is finished.
LOW INK LEVEL

• When the ink level is low, selecting CONTINUE will start printing.
PAPER LEVER ERROR

• When the Paper Selector Lever is not in the correct position.
WASTE TANK FULL

• When the waste ink tank is full, pressing the Reset button on the BJ printer will start printing. Be sure to request replacement of
the waste ink tank as soon as possible.
PRINTER COVER OPEN

• When the front cover of the printer is open.
NO PRINTHEAD
• When the print head is not installed.
MEDIA TYPE ERROR

• When a paper type was selected that cannot be used in the printer.
84
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. P.C.B. Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
2. Power Supply Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2-1 Startup of Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2-2 Power Fuses ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
2-3 Power Supply Circuits ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
3. Built-in Charger Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
3-2 Operation at Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
3-2-1 Conditions To Start Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
3-2-2 Progress of Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
4. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11
4-2-1 2M Camera System --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-2-2 Camera Motion Picture Recording --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-2-3 Card Still Picture Recording ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
4-2-4 Card Motion Picture Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
4-2-5 MPEG-4 Motion Picture File ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
4-4 Audio Signal Flow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
5. System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
5-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
5-3 Servo Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
5-4-1 Normal Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
5-4-2 My Camera Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
5-4-3 Newwork Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
5-5 Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22
MVX3i E
1. P.C.B. Functions
(1) MAIN P.C.B.
System-Control Section
• IC100 2.5V REGULATOR 2.5V regulator
• IC101 BACKUP MODE MODE MI-COM resetting
• IC102 RESET Detects a DC JACK voltage to the MODE MI-COM
• IC103 CCM MI-COM MI-COM for system control, camera, card
• IC104 CMOS LOGIC Inverter for manual focus ring rotation detection line
• IC105 16M FLASH Memory for MMC MI-COM
Camera/Card Section
• IC1000 CDS/AD 2ch CCD output signal sampling, A/D converter
• IC1001 TG CCD timing generator
• IC1002 MPX AGC, image composition, flaw correction
• IC1004 72MHz X’tal OSC Crystal resonator
• IC1005 CMOS LOGIC CMOS logic
• IC1101 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV (64M)
• IC1102 DIGIC DV Camera digital signal processing, card image processing, USB interface
• IC1103 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV (64M)
• IC1201 IRIS DRIVE Iris driver, gyro output amplifier
• IC1202 D/A CONVERTER D/A converter for adjustment
• IC1203 OPE AMP Operational amplifier for ND filter control
• IC1205 OPE AMP Operational amplifier for ND filter control
• IC1301 MOTOR DRIVE Zoom, focus motor driver
• IC1601 MOTOR DRIVE Shift lens driver
• IC1602 D/A CONVERTER D/A converter for adjustment
• IC1603 OPE AMP Operational amplifier for shift lens control
PM Section
• IC1801 OPE AMP Operational amplifier for charge circuit
• IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL Power PWM regulator controller
Video Section
• IC2000 VRP2 Record playback head amplifier
• IC2101 VIF2 Analog video input/output signal processing
• IC2301 VIC3 Digital VCR signal processing LSI, IEEE1394 interface, FR MI-COM
(mechanism, video, audio control)
• IC2302 SDRAM Memory for VIC3 (64M)
• IC2303 DUAL FLASH Memory for FR MI-COM
MO Driver Section
• IC300 MOTOR DRIVE Drum, capstan, loading motor driver
• IC301 OPE AMP Operational amplifier for reel sensor
Audio Section
• IC801 AUDIO INTERFACE Analog input/output signal processing
• IC802 SP DRIVER Speaker amplifier
• IC803 4V REGULATOR 4V regulator (for speaker amplifier)
MEP4 Section
• IC400 MPEG4 Card motion picture MEPG processing
1
MVX3i E
USB Section
• IC3500 USB I/F USB interface
CVF Section
• IC1501 EVF DRIVER EVF LCD (CVF) drive
(2) CCD P.C.B.

• IC1000 CCD CCD image sensor
• IC1001 OPE AMP CCD output operational amplifier
• IC1005 V-DRIVER CCD V driver
• IC1006 OPE AMP CCD output operational amplifier
(3) LJ-1 P.C.B.

USB connector, DV connector
(4) LJ-2 P.C.B.

• IC1691 P SENSOR GYRO Pitch-direction angular speed detection
AV, MIC jack, charge LED
(5) GY P.C.B.
• IC1611 Y SENSOR GYRO Yaw-direction angular speed detection
TALLY LED
(6) R-KEY P.C.B.

Right Cover side buttons, memory card slots, lithium battery
(7) LCD P.C.B.

• IC901 EEPROM EEPROM for LCD section data
• IC902 LCD DRIVE LCD signal processing, drive
• IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL Back-light drive
(8) CVF P.C.B.

Signal transfer from MAIN P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, back-light LED turn-on
2
MVX3i E
2. Power Supply Circuit
<Outline>
The power supply of this machine provides the following advantageous features:
• When the DC jack is disconnected from the battery with power turned ON, power goes OFF once.
• The internal battery is charged only when the MAIN switch is at the P OFF position.
• When the DC jack not connected with power source (not supplied with power) is inserted into the main unit, power is not turned
on even if the battery is mounted. “A changeover of main power to the battery is not made since an event of DC jack mechanism
detection takes precedence.”
2-1 Startup of Power Supply
DC P.C.B. R-KEY P.C.B. L FPC UNIT POWER SW
DC JACK LITHIUM EJ SW DMC-III

BATTERY CASSETTE
SJACK
IN SW
P.C.B.
48 CN103 CN100 7 CN303 12 CN2952 19 20 21

MAIN P.C.B.
CN3201
DC+
3
2
DC JACK
3 13
DET
IC101
3V BACK UP N3 EJECT SW CAS IN N2
14 E3V
REG.
VTR M4
POWER SW
DET 4 G5 E3 DET
CAMERA M3
POWER SW
SW 12 VCC
NET J1
POWER SW
RESET 11 G1 RESET
2.6V 2
DET. V13 LI DET
IC103
N1 DC J DET
CCM
5 7
MI-COM.
L2 CAM ON
2.5V
REG.
DVDD
L3 VTR ON
2.7V
CHARGE
CN3202 K3
3 IC102
BATT+ 5 4 SERIAL
4
Q1803 RESET DATA
Q1802
VTR ON IC2301
PM SECTION FR
MI-COM.
(VIC3)
Fig. 1
3
MVX3i E
• Backup Lithium Battery

LI3V power from the lithium battery is input to pin 3 of the IC101, and it is output from pin 12 as power to the CCM MI-COM.
Thus, the CCM MI-COM performs data backup and clock operation when main power supply is not connected.
When the voltage of the lithium battery decreases below 2.6 V (or when the lithium battery is not loaded), the IC101 outputs the “L”
signal form pin 2. Upon receipt of this signal at the time of power-on, the CCM MI-COM sends it to the FR MI-COM, which then
issue a lithium battery low-level warning indication.
• Main Power Supply

Main power (DC-JACK/BATTERY) is supplied to pin 13 of IC101. Through the internal regulator in IC101, the main power thus
supplied is converted to 3V power, which is output as E3V from pin 14 of IC102. Furthermore, through the internal switch, the
main power is converted to LI3V, which is output from pin 12 of IC102 as a power voltage for driving the CCM MI-COM.
Supplied with the main power, pin 4 of IC101 and pin 4 of IC102 becomes “High” and the CCM MI-COM detects that the main
power supply is loaded. Then, the CCM MI-COM performs initialization to set up a standby state. In this state, the CCM MI-COM
carries out detection of start-related switch signals. Upon detection of these switch signals, the CCM MI-COM delivers the CAM
ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals from its pins L2 and L3. When the CAM ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals are output, each circuit
power is made active.
When each circuit power is made active, 3V power is input to pins 5/7 of IC101. 3V power is output as the power for the CCM MI-
COM from pin 12 of IC102 to save its power consumption.
4
MVX3i E
2-2 Power Fuses
MAIN P.C.B.
CN3201 FU3201
3 DC + SHOE UNREG
FU3202
2.5V, 12V, CCD,
VTR UNREG
FU3203
1.4V, 2.7V
FU3204
3.3V, 4.7V, P5V
CHARGE FU3205
MECHA UNREG
FU3206
DC/DC CONVERTOR
UNREG
FU3207
STROBE UNREG
CN3202 FU1801
3,4 BATT + MICOM UNREG
Fig. 2
The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to eight fuses on the MAIN P.C.B., through which the following eight power
voltage are delivered.
(1) SHOE UNREG : FU3201

• Accessory shoe power source UNREG.
(2) 2.5V/12V/CCD/VCR UNREG : FU3202

• 2.5V power source (DVDD 2.5V)
• LCD drive power source (12V)
• CCD drive power source (-7V, +15V)
• VCR UNREG
(3) 1.4V + 2.7V : FU3203

• 1.4V power source (DVDD 1.4V, DIGIC DV 1.4V, AVDD 1.4V)
• 2.7V power source (DVDD 2.7V, CAM 2.7V, SDRAM 2.7V, LCD 2.7V, AA 2.7V, AVDD 2.7V, DIF 2.7V)
(4) 3.3V + 4.7V + P5 : FU2304

• 3.3V power source (USB 3.3V, HA3.3V)
• 4.7V power source (AA 4.7V, CAM 4.7V, VIF 4.7V, HA 4.7V)
• 5V power source (P 5V)
(5) MECHA UNREG : FU3205

• DRUM /CAPSTAN
(6) DC/DC UNREG : FU3206

• DC/DC CONVERTER
(7) ST UNREG : FU3207

• Strobe shoe power source
(8) MI-COM UNREG : FU1801

• MI-COM UNREG (BATTERY)
5
MVX3i E
2-3 Power Supply Circuits

Figure 3 shows the power supply circuits.
The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the CAM ON, VTR ON signals output from the CCM MI-COM.
MAIN P.C.B. LPF DIGIC DV 1.4V
LPF VIC 1.4V

46
UNREG
LPF AVDD 1.4V
PWM 50 REG. LPF DVDD 1.4V

CH-1 Q3204
LPF CAM 2.7V
43
UNREG
LPF DIF 2.7V
PWM 53 REG. LPF LCD 2.7V

CH-2 Q3205
IC3201 LPF SDRAM 2.7V
DC/DC
LPF AVDD 2.7V
CONVERTER
CONTROL LPF DVDD 2.7V
40
UNREG
LPF AA 2.7V
PWM 56 REG. LPF DVDD 2.5V

CH-3 Q3206
P 5V
37
UNREG
HA 4.7V
IC3202
PWM 57 REG. REG. LPF AA 4.7V
CH-4 Q3207
LPF CAM 4.7V
21
UNREG LPF DIF 4.7V
PWM 60 REG. DRUM VS

CH-5 Q3208
15
UNREG
PWM 61 REG. CAP VS

CH-6 Q3209
11
UNREG
D3203
LPF CCD 15V
PWM 62 REG.
CH-7 LPF CCD -7V
Q3203 D3205
T3201
VTR ON 28
5
29 UNREG
30
PWM 64 REG. LPF LCD 12V
CAM ON 31
CH-8 Q3210
D3201
Fig. 3
6
MVX3i E
3. Built-in Charger Circuit
DC MAIN P.C.B.
P.C.B.
DC JACK DET
CN3201
2 DC J SW
DC IC102
DC JACK DET
3 DC+
JACK RESET
1 DC-
E3 DET
G5 N1
Q1804 Q1805
Q1801 INIT CHG2
K4
Q1803 BATT AD
A3
INIT CHG1
L6
IC103
CCM
MI-COM.
CHAGE
Q1802 K3
A/D I
L3
A4 B3
IC1801
A/D V
BATT INFO AD
BATTERY
CN3202
1,2 BATT-
3,4 BATT+
5 BATT INFO AD
D
6 BATT E3 BATT E3
B
Fig. 4
7
MVX3i E
3-1 Outline
The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows.
(1) IC103 : CCM MI-COM

• Charging voltage and charging current control
• Detection and display of charging progress
• Error discrimination and display
• Battery type discrimination and DC jack input detection
(2) IC 1801 : OPE AMP

• Signal amplification for detecting charging current
(3) Q1801/Q1802 : MOS form FET

• Power supply changeover switch
(4) Q1803 : TRANSISTOR

• Trickle charge current control
(5) Q1804 : MOS form FET

• Trickle charge current control
(6) Q1805 : TRANSISTOR

• Trickle charge switch
3-2 Operation at Charging
3-2-1 Conditions To Start Charging

When the following conditions are satisfied, the CCM MI-COM (IC103) starts charging.
Conditions Detection Source of detection

Main unit power is turned OFF. CCM MI-COM (pin M3/M4/J1) POWER SW
Battery is installed. CCM MI-COM Battery D terminal
(pin B3 : BATT INFO AD) (CN3202 pin 5)
DC JACK is inserted. CCM MI-COM DC JACK
(pin N1 : DC JACK DET) (CN3201 pin 2)
DC JACK input voltage is 8.4±0.3V. CCM MI-COM
(pin A3 : BATT AD) DC JACK
CCM MI-COM (CN3201 pin 2)
(pin G5 : E3 DET)
8
MVX3i E
3-2-2 Progress of Charging

When the conditions described in 3-2-1 are satisfied, the CCM MI-COM starts charging according to the specifications in Fig.5.
The charging current in quick charge can be restricted by CA-570.
* Charging is allowed to start provided that the UNREG voltage is 8.4 ± 0.3V before
starting the charging. Otherwise, an error is indicated.
* Charging can be performed provided that the power is turned OFF.
* If the DC JACK is detected, the charging is turned OFF when the power is turned ON
(no power supplied from the battery). LED lights up steadily
(Up to battery installed/removed
LED flashes once LED flashes twice and power turned ON)
Charging current
Quick charge 1.525A ± 0.075A

If the battery is not installed/removed
When battery voltage 1.1A after completion of charge, charging
becomes 6.5V, ADI detection voltage does not start unless the battery voltage
quick charge starts. = 1.706V becomes 7V or lower.
* An error is indicated and charging is turned OFF if the battery voltage becomes 6.4V
or lower during charging other than trickles 1 and 2.
* An error is indicated and charging is turned OFF if the battery voltage becomes 5V
or lower during charging trickle 2.
* An error is indicated and charging is turned OFF if the charging voltage is 1.8A or higher
(detected voltage > 2.7V).
* Charging is turned OFF if the charging current is 70mA or lower. BP511/BP512/BP508
: 10 min.
BP522 : 10 min.
If the battery voltage BP535 : 10 min.
becomes 5.2V,
the trickle 2 starts. 100mA
350mA max. ADI detection voltage 70mA
= 0.155V ADI detection
Trickle 1 voltage
50mA max. = 0.109V
Lapsed time
TOTAL TIMER Charge

ended
BATT V < 5.2V BATT V 6.5V BATT V 6.5V BATT V 8.0V

INIT-CHG1 ON ADI detection voltage > 1.706V 0.155V < ADI detection voltage ADI detection voltage
INIT-CHG2 OFF INIT-CHG1 OFF 1.706V 0.109V
CHG OFF INIT-CHG2 OFF INIT-CHG1 OFF INIT-CHG1 OFF
CHG ON INIT-CHG2 OFF INIT-CHG2 OFF
CHG ON CHG OFF
Torque 1 timer Quick charge timer 2-flash timer

110 min. max. Error indicated and LED lit and charging ended at
Error indicated and charging OFF at timeout timeout
charging OFF at timeout
BP511/BP512/BP508 : 2Hmax BP511/BP512/BP508 : 2Hmax
BP522 : 4Hmax BP522 : 4Hmax
5.2V BATT V < 6.5V BATT V 8.0V

INIT-CHG1 ON 0.109V < ADI detection voltage 0.155V
INIT-CHG2 ON INIT-CHG1 OFF
CHG OFF INIT-CHG2 OFF
CHG ON
Torque 2 timer Total timer Supplementary timer
100 min. max. LED lit and charging ended at LED lit and charging ended at
Error indicated and timeout timeout
charging OFF at timeout
BP511/BP512/BP508 : 6Hmax BP511/BP512/BP508 : 1Hmax
Fig. 5
9
MVX3i E
4. Signal Processing Circuit
4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit

Figure 6 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.
CCD P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B.
IC1000 IC1000 IC1002 IC1501

LENS
CCD CDS/AD MPX EVF DRIVE
CVF
IC1001 P.C.B.
TG
MEMORY
CARD
CVF LCD
IC1101
SDRAM
IC1102 IC1103
DIGIC DV SDRAM
R-KEY P.C.B.
IC400
MPEG4
USB
LJ-1 P.C.B. IC2301

VIC3
USB IC3500 LCD P.C.B.
TERMINAL USB
IC902
DV LCD
TERMINAL DIF DRIVE
LJ-2 P.C.B. IC2303

LCD
SDRAM
MIN AV IC2100
JACK VIF2
FR IC2000
MICOM VRP2
REC/PB
IC801
HEAD
AIF3
MIC
IC802
SP DRIVE
SPEAKER
Fig. 6
10
MVX3i E
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing
4-2-1 2Megapixels Camera System
IC1000
CCD
: Analog Signal
: Digital Signal
IC1002
IC1000 MPX
CDS/AD
CDS AD Image Missing

adjustment, pixel IC1102
picture compensation DIGIC DV
composition (32 points)
CDS AD
36MHz
2ch 14bit 12bit
36MHz 72MHz
IC1001
TG
Fig. 7
On this machine, reading coping with increased CCD picture elements can be coped by two systems of circuit with CCD which is split
into left and right parts as illustrated above.
The two systems of video signal are distinctly subjected to A/D conversion, are composed into a single image by MPX-IC, and are sent
to DIGIC DV for camera signal processing.
4-2-2 Camera Motion Picture Recording
64 Mbit SDRAM 64 Mbit SDRAM

IC1101 IC1103
32 bit 32 bit
CCD
IC1000
MPEG4
SDRAM IF
IC400
36MHz
2ch
Deformation,
Synthesis
Drawing VIC3
CDS/AD MPX proc resize nr COMP
REND IC2301
IC1000 IC1002
Camera signal
36MHz 72MHz processing
14bit 12bit JPEG
JPEG CARD IF
GRAB
IC103
AIF CCM
IC801 Audio MI-COM
USB
IC1102
Fig. 8
11
MVX3i E
4-2-3 Card Still Picture Recording

IC1101 IC1103
CCD 32 bit 32 bit

IC1000 CCM
SDRAM IF DMA MI-COM
36MHz
IC103
RAW YCC 1 YCC 2
2ch
Deformation, Synthesis
Drawing MPEG4
COMP
CDS/AD MPX REND IC400
proc resize nr
IC1000 IC1002
Camera signal
36MHz 72MHz processing JPEG CARD IF
14bit 12bit VIC3
GRAB
IC2301
AIF
IC801 Audio
SD
IC1102 USB CARD
Fig. 9
4-2-4 Card Motion Picture Recording

IC1101 IC1103
CCD
IC1000 32 bit 32 bit
CCM
SDRAM IF DMA
MI-COM
36MHz IC103
2ch RAW YCC 1 YCC 2
Deformation,
Synthesis
Drawing MPEG4
CDS/AD MPX COMP
REND
IC1000 IC1002 proc resize nr IC400
Camera signal
36MHz 72MHz
14bit 12bit processing JPEG CARD IF
GRAB VIC3
IC2301
AIF Audio
IC801
SD
IC1102 USB
CARD
Fig. 10
12
MVX3i E
<CCD> IC1000 / CCD P.C.B.

• 1/3.4 inches interlaced CCD
• RGB elementary color filter
• Total number of pixels Approx. 2,200,000
Effective number of pixels :
Approx. 1,770,000 for tape recording
Approx. 2,000,000 for card recording
<CDS/AD> IC1000 / MAIN P.C.B.

Extracts signals read through 2 left and right channels from CCD, eliminates noise components, performs A/D conversion, and then
outputs digital signal through 2 channels.
<MPX> IC1002
Composes picture data input through 2 left and right channels, and corrects the offsets. Then, performs AGC processing, corrects
CCD flaws, and outputs the signal through 1 channel.
<DIGIC DV> IC1102

Performs different camera signal processing (EIS, AWB, etc.) and digital effect processing. Also performs signal processing for
coping with multi media centered on still picture shooting.
• Feature engine
• High-speed card interface
• JPEG
• Audio data compression (ADPCM)
• USB function
<SDRAM> IC1101/1103
Memory for DIGIC DV
13
MVX3i E
4-2-5 MPEG-4 Motion Picture File
● ASF File
Video and audio data is integrally put into a file according to a standard set forth by MicroSoft.
ISO MP4 can be enumerated as a standard for putting into a file, but ASF is adopted by this machine.
Based on this standard, MPEG-4 compressed video data and G.726 compressed audio data are jointly put into ASF file.
Therefore, even a file with an extender of ASF cannot be played back by this machine if the compression format of data contained
in it is different. MediaPlayer of Windows plays back data upon specifying a decoder based on information contained in the header
of ASF file.
● MPEG-4 Video Compression Method

While Motion-JPEG uses only “frame inside compression”, MPEG uses “inter-frame compression” also.
■ Motion-JPEG
Series of frame inside compressed data as JPEG image
Time
Fig. 11
QVGA (320 × 240) corresponds to 1.5 Mbits/sec to 2 Mbits/sec.
■ MPEG-4
• I frame (Intra Picture) : Frame inside compression only the same as Motion-JPEG.
• P frame (Predictive Picture) : Reducing the data quantity by a prediction from preceding frames.
I P P P P I P P P I P P P
Time
Cycle of 1 frame
Fig. 12
• The data is 352 Kbits/sec for CIF (352 × 288), and 96 Kbits/sec for QCIF (176 × 144).
• In case of 6Mbit data, the recording time is about 30 seconds for M-JPEG (QVGA), and about 2 minutes for MPEG4 (CIF).
● G.726 Audio Compression Method

This is a kind of ADPCM compression.
8KHz sampled 4bit monaural data is turned into 32kbits/sec.
14
MVX3i E
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing
VIC BLOCK DIF BLOCK
IC2303 SDRAM DIF DV

SDRAM INTERFACE INTERFACE TERMINAL
VIDEO
A DATA HEAD
IC1102 VIDEO COMPRESSION REC/PB IC2000
ECC
DIGIC DV B DATA INTERFACE /DEMOD. PROCESS VRP2
IC2100 AUDIO IC801 AV

D/A A/D BUS
VIF2 INTERFACE AIF3 JACK
AV JACK
S TERMINAL
CVF R,G,B MI-COM. BLOCK
LCD
LCD FR MI-COM.
IC2301
VIC3
Fig. 13
< VIC3 >IC2301

• The VIC, MI-COM, DIF INTERFACE and (USB INTERFACE) circuits are integrated on a single semiconductor chip.
• A/B DATA : Input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIGIC DV digital effect circuit is
used at playback.)
The video data and signals input to VIC3 are subjected to digital VCR format signal processing. Audio data,
subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC3, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of
DV format.
• DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital
input, the data enters VIC3 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.
< VRP2 >IC2000

Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC3 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head
switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC3.
< VIF2 >IC2100

Y and C signals sent from VIC3 are output as Y, C signals for S terminal and composite video.
At line input, input signals undergo level adjustment, sync signal separation and are output to VIC3.
15
MVX3i E
4-4 Audio Signal Flow
L
MIC R
L
IC1102 IC2301 IC2000
HEAD DIGIC DV VIC3 VRP2
R
PHONE
L IC801
REC/
AV AIF3
R MEM IF CARD IF PB
JACK
L HEAD
EXT
R
MIC SDRAM CARD
L+R
+ IC802
BEEP FR
−
SPEAKER
MI-COM.
DRIVER
SPEAKER
Fig. 14
< AIF >IC801

Carries out switching between internal and external microphones (by means of serial data from CCM MI-COM),plus ALC (Auto
Level Control), manual audio level adjustment, fading, and amplification of various output signals. For the beep tone issued at
ejection, etc., the signal from the FR MI-COM is generated in the circuit and changed over in the AIF.
The microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A, and digital I/F circuits are contained in this IC. It is also used for changeover
between ordinary voice sound and beep sound.
< SPEAKER DRIVER >IC802

This integrated circuit is used for speaker drive operation.
16
MVX3i E
5. System Control, Servo
5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo

Figure 15 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is performed
by the FR MI-COM (IC2301) and CCM MI-COM (IC103) on MAIN P.C.B.
R-KEY P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. DRUM

IC3201 D-VS
M
MEMORY IC1102 DC/DC C-VS DRUM
MPEG4 CONVERTER DRIVER
CARD DIGIC DV
FG/PG
PWM D PWM C
MF FPC CAPSTAN
M
DFG/PG CAPSTAN
DIAL SW
CFG DRIVER
VIC
FG
MF RING IC300
DETECT MOTOR
DRIVER DMC III
LOADING
IC2301 LOADING
M
REMOTE CONTROL VIC3 DRIVER
SIGNAL RECEIVER
IC2300
FLASH MODE SW
LOW-RIGHT C.DOWN SW
BOT/EOT
FR
COVER ASS'Y MI-COM
SENS.
DEW
IC2000 REEL FG
P.AE
VRP2
CONTROL KEY HEAD

IC2100
VIF2
IC801
POWER SW SJACK AIF3 <TAPE>
P.C.B.
MIC
START/STOP IC103
SW CCM
MI-COM
PHOTO SW
R-KEY LCD P.C.B.
EJECT
P.C.B.
ZOOM SW IC1001
SW
TG
L FPC
R-KEY P.C.B.
IC1000 IC901
CDS A/D EEPROM
IC1301 IC1601 IC1201 IC1501 IC902

MOTOR SHIFT IRIS EVF LCD
LENS
DRIVER DRIVER DRIVE DRIVER DRIVER
Fig. 15
17
MVX3i E
5-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer

(1) FR MI-COM (IC2301 : VIC3)
The FR MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through communi-
cation with CCM MI-COM. It also detects of various sensors and switches (DMCIII). Following are the major functions.
• VIC (Video) VIF2 (Video Interface) control / AIF3 (Audio Interface) controls / DIF (Digital Interface) controls
• DMC III mechanism control
• OSD (On Screen Display) bitmap control
• IS (Image Stabilizer) control
(2) CCM MI-COM (IC103)

CCM MI-COM integrates CARD, CAMERA and MODE MI-COM. Its main functions are shown below.
• Key input
• LCD / EVF control
• Remote control input
• Power ON/OFF control
• Built-in charge circuit control
• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control
• USB interface control
• DIGIC DV control
• Card control
• CCD drive control
• AE, AF, AWB control
18
MVX3i E
5-3 Servo Control

Servo control is carried out by the VIC3 (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/OFF and
rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in terms of signal
flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FR MI-COM.
Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal (PWM), which
is driven on the MAIN P.C.B. for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.
DERR
DC/DC
CERR CONVERTER
DRUM VS
CAP VS
DMC III
LOAD+/LOAD-
LOADING MOTOR
LOAD ON/
UNLOAD FR IC300 U/V/W
DRUM MOTOR
MO DRIVE
VIC3 Ucoil/Vcoil/Wcoil
CAPSTAN MOTOR
DA CFG CFG2
DA S REEL
S REEL Hall SENSOR
DA T REEL
T REEL Hall SENSOR
Fig. 16
19
MVX3i E
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode
5-4-1 Normal Operation
Signal flow of Card Camera mode.

IC1101
IC1000 IC1000
IC1103
CCD CDS/AD Signal flow of Personal computer
SDRAM
connection mode.
IC1102
DIGIC DV
IC1002 Still Picture
MEMORY
MPX/AGC Signal
CARD
Processing
IC400
Motion MPEG4
Picture
Signal
Processing IC3500
CCM USB
USB
MI-COM TERMINAL
CONTROLER
Fig. 17
In the card camera mode, an image signal produced in the camera section is sent to the memory card via the DIGIC DV. In the
personal computer connection mode, the USB terminal and the memory card are connected through the USB controller.
The CCM MI-COM performs control of changeover between the card camera mode and the personal computer connection mode.
20
MVX3i E
5-4-2 My Camera Setting

If my camera setting is made from PC, contents data is stored in the external flash memory of CCM MI-COM/FR MI-COM as
illustrated above.
Audio data is stored in FR flash memory, and video/file control data is stored in CCM flash memory.
USB
IC3500
ZOOM TERMINAL
USB
BROWSER My camera contents data flow
CONTROLER
(IMAGE BROWSER)
1
IC2301 2 '
VIC3 SDRAM
IC1102
SDRAM DIGIC DV (FR uCOM)
3 '
IC103
IC104 IC2303
CCM
CCM FR
uCOM
FLASH FLASH
Fig. 18
5-4-3 Network Mode

If the main power switch is set at network mode, the control from host PC takes a precedence, (DMV 2.0) thereby invalidating the
operation of switches/keys on the main unit except:
• Main power switch
• EJECT switch
• LCD panel open/close/invert
• Speaker voltage control at playback
• Zoom key for camera
• Manual focus control for camera (AF/MF changed by PC)
21
MVX3i E
5-5 Error Detection

If an abnormality has been occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD
indicates “PLEASE UNLOAD THE CASSETTE” and blinks “EJECT”.
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.
Kind Condition Detection
Drum error Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG
FG frequency when steady 900Hz
Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%.
Steady : 30% max.
Error detecting time Starting : 5sec.
Steady : 0.6sec.
Capstan error Error detecting mode Starting / steady C-FG
FG frequency when steady 1347Hz
Error detecting level Starting : 80% max.
Steady : 60Hz max.
Error detecting time Starting : 2sec.
Steady : 2sec.
Reel error Error detecting mode Starting / Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG
Error detection Normally : The C-FG count per reel FG cycle is C-FG
Starting : 3294 or more
Steady : 2256 or more
UNLOAD : Reel FG half cycle is 1 sec or more
(Take-up reel only for both)
Loading error Error detecting mode M ode transfer M ode SW
Error detection M ode transfer time
STANDBY-STOP : 6sec
STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec
STOP-PLAY : 3sec
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table gives processing after error detection.
During Loading During tape During mode

Cassette in Loading
loading completed running transfer
Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop
• Pop up : Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear

• Error stop : Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
22
INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-2 List of Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
2. Setting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
2-1 Setting A ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
2-2 Setting B ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2-3 Setting C ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
3. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
3-4 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
4. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
4-1 Error Rate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
4-2 Mechanical Error Indication ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
4-3 Cleaning Mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
4-4 Commands Particular to Camera ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-6-1 CCM MI-COM Input Port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-6-2 CCM MI-COM A/D Port -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
5. Service Hints ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14
5-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
5-2 Location of Main Elements ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
5-3 Current Consumption Check --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
6. Trouble Shooting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
6-1 Power Supply --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
6-2 Camera Picture Faulty ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
6-3 Faulty of Playback Picture ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20
6-4 Startup Window Setting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
MVX3i E
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/PAL) DY9-1381-00 Recorder electrical adjustment
Alignment T ape (tracking) DY9-1379-000 Running adjustment DMC III
Cassette T orque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC III
DV Cleaning T ape (hard) DY9-1384-000 Head cleaning DMC III
Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment DMC III
Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Color Viewer 5600° K for 220V DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220V)
Color Viewer 5600° K for 240V DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240V)
Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement
Filter, CCA W12ø46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment
CASSET T E, SERVICE MODE DY9-1386-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment
EXT ENSION CONNECT OR (24pin) DY9-1390-000 T est pin extended
CCD image adjustment tool DY9-1391-000 CCD adjustment NEW
MOUNT (46MM) DY9-1392-000 CCD adjustment NEW
1-2 List of Supplies
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Grease FLOIL C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication DMC III
Logenest Lambda A-74 CY9-8102-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GE-C9 DY9-8043-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease FLOIL 948P DY9-3051-000 Lubrication DMC III
Hanal FL-778 DY9-3026-010 Lubrication Cover
Hanal KS-39M DY9-3053-000 Lubrication Cover
Dia Bond No. 1663G CY9-8129-000 Adhesive LCD
Sponge (W × H × T : 300mm × 200mm × 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating
/sound absorbing material
Adhesive T ape, No.354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
(W × L × T : 9mm × 50m × 0.15mm, UL type)
Adhesive T ape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose
(W × L × T : 10mm × 50m × 0.16mm, UL type) double-side-coated adhesive tape
Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm × 250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material
1
MVX3i E
2. Setting
(1) Adjustments other than DMC-III : Perform adjustments in the product state.
(2) Tracking adjustment (DMC-III) and Envelope check : Perform them with the Setting A.
(3) Adjustments related to DMC-III other than Tracking adjustment, tape path system check and tape path system cleaning : Perform
them with the Setting B.
(4) CCD image adjustment: Carry it out in Setting C.
2-1 Setting A
Envelope Check)
(1) Detach the Lithium Battery Cover.
(2) Detach the Service Connector Cover.
(3) Connect the extension connector (DY9-1390-000) to
CN2900.
(4) Observe the PB-RF waveform output from the extension con-
nector
Extension connector (DY9-1390-000)

Pin No. Signal Designation
15 SWP
17 GND
19 PBRF
DY9-1390-000
Tracking Adjustment) Fig. 1

(1) Remove the CASSETTE COVER referring to Fig. 2 (a), (b).
(2) When the posts are going to be adjusted, eject and remove the cassette once and perform the prospective adjustment as shown in
Fig. 2 (c).
(3) Repeat the observation of the PB-RF waveform and the prospective adjustment until fluctuation of envelope is re-moved.
Note : For tracking, refer to “2-8: Tape Path Adjustment” on p. 72 of “DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT”.
ADJUSTMENT DRIVER
(DY9-2053-000)
(a)
(b) (c)
Fig. 2
2
MVX3i E
2-2 Setting B
(1) Referring to Section “Disassembly/Reassembly”, detach the Top Cover Unit, Right Cover Unit, Rear Cover Unit and Left Cover
Unit.
(2) Detach the S Jack P.C.B., Power SW Ass’y and FPC, Junction.
Note 1 : Referring to Fig.3, connect the required cables.
Note 2 : Observe the signal in the same manner as that for setting A.
Note 3 : For EJECT, select the service mode and use the wireless remote controller.
(Note : Same manner for recorder keys)
(A) When the output to a monitor is carried out

from S terminal
MONITOR TV
WIRELESS CONTROLLER
CN50 S Jack P.C.B.

CN51
DC IN
CN2952 POWER SWITCH ASS'Y

CA-570
FPC, Junction
(B) When the output to a monitor is carried out

from AV terminal
WIRELESS CONTROLLER
MONITOR TV
L COVER ASS'Y
TO
AV IN/OUT
CN50 S Jack P.C.B.

CN51
DC IN
CN2952 POWER SWITCH ASS'Y

CA-570
FPC, Junction
CN2951
Fig. 3
3
MVX3i E
2-3 Setting C
Preparation)
(1) Before using the CCD image adjustment tool (DY9-1391-000), apply power to it for at least 15 minutes (for stabilizing the light
source).
(2) Use the CA-570 power supply unit for the CCD image adjustment tool.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to Fig. 4, connect the cables necessary for this setting (except the S cable). Then, turn on power to the tool.
(2) After power-on of the tool, connect the S cable between the main unit and the tool (S-IN).
(3) Detach the lens hood from the top of the lens assembly, and attach the MOUNT, 46 MM (DY9-1392-000) in place of it.
(4) On the MOUNT attached on the main unit in step (3), set the LED light source properly. Secure the LED light source by tightening
its thumbscrew.
(5) In the last step, turn on power to the main unit.
Note)
(1) After turning on power to the tool, make sure that the LED light source is bright. If not, check the tool and cable connections.
(2) The S cable is intended for controlling emission from the LED light source of the CCD image adjustment tool. It is usable for
adding a control signal to video signals on the product side. If the S cable is not connected properly, you cannot attain correct
results of adjustment using the tool for the main unit.
(3) In CCD image adjustment at high temperature, carry out the above steps (2) through (4) without turning off power to both the main
unit and tool.
CCD image adjustment tool WIRELESS CONTROLLER
CA-570
R
G
B
CA-570
S Cable
MOUNT,
46MM Thumb screw
LED
Light source
Fig. 4
4
MVX3i E
3. Service Modes
3-1 Outline
(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2)
(2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1386-000) is required in addition to
the wireless remote controller.
(3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the “Audio dubbing” and “SLOW” keys of the
wireless remote controller.
As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the “CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE” is removed.
(4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be handled using the keys on the main unit and the remote control
code 1.
(5) In the service mode, safety functions such as for mechanical error detection, DEW detection and low voltage detection are canceled.
(6) In the service mode, the LCD mirror function is canceled.
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode

(1) Cassette for changeover to service mode (DY9-1386-000)
Set the ((CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE)) in the equipment
and load the data.
(2) Press the “Dubbing” key on the wireless remote controller
that is set at Remote controller code + T (2sec.).
* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press
“Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys si-
multaneously for 2 sec.
* The remote controller code setting on the DVC main
unit is operable both at remote controller codes 1
DY9-1386-000
and 2.
(3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completed
and the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen. Fig. 5
* Pressing the “SLOW key” performs the changeover

to the normal mode from the service mode.
As long as the power supply is ON, the service mode
is available by setting the “Audio dubbing key” even
if the cassette for transfer to service mode is re-
moved.
Fig. 6
5
MVX3i E
3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode

(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2.
* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press the “Remote controller setting” and “Zoom T” keys simulta-
neously for 2 sec.
Remote Controller
Code 2 setting
3. START/STOP
5. SEARCH -
4. SEARCH +
10. SEARCH SELECT
11. PLAY
9. REW
8. FF
13. PAUSE
6. FRAME +
7. FRAME -
12. STOP
1. DUBBING
14. ×2
2. SLOW
Fig. 7
No. Key Designation (in Normal Mode) Key Designation (in Service Mode) Function
1 DUBBING SERVICE MODE Change over to service mode
2 SLOW NORMAL MODE Change over to normal mode
3 START/STOP CS+ Increases CS by 1.
4 SEARCH + FUNCTION + Increases FUNCTION by 1.
5 SEARCH - FUNCTION - Decreases FUNCTION by 1.
6 FRAME + HIGH ADDRESS + Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.
7 FRAME - HIGH ADDRESS - Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.
8 FF ADDRESS + Increases ADDRESS by 1.
9 REW ADDRESS - Decreases ADDRESS by 1.
10 SEARCH SELECT MODE SELECT Change over to RD/WR mode
11 PLAY DATA + Increases DATA by 1.
12 STOP DATA - Decreases DATA by 1.
13 PAUSE STORE Defines/w rites DATA.
14 ×2 EJECT Performs EJECT.
6
MVX3i E
3-4 Indication in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
4 18 5 6 8 9
1
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 17
Fig. 8
1. Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (“SERV”)

2. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)
3. Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.)
4. CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F)
5. Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)
6. ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)
7. DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)
8. Indicates the mechanical status. (POPUP, STBY, LOAD1, LOAD2, STOP, PLAY)
9. Indicates the absolute track No.
10. Indicates the mechanical error. (Main power supply backup)
11. Indicates mechanical error history (LITHIUM 3V battery backup)
12. Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the FR MI-COM.
13. Indicates the version of the CCM MI-COM.
14. Indicates the version of the CAMERA program in the CCM MI-COM.
15. Indicates the version of the CARD program in the CCM MI-COM.
16. E0 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH0 (Low ch) head.
17. E1 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH1 (High ch) head.
18. Data Write status (0: READ mode, 4 : Write preparation, C : Write execution)
7
MVX3i E
4. Description of Service Modes
4-1 Error Rate
<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.
(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure
in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.
<How to read a VIDEO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-
cated in exponential representation. Low ch. High ch.
EO 2 5 E1
Example) ‘25’ is indicated:
Error rate = 2×10 -5
-5
2 × 10
Fig. 9
<How to read an AUDIO error rate>

To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the
table below. Low ch. High ch.
The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync AO 2 3 A1
blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.
(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)
Example) ‘23’is indicated:

2 3 (hexadecimal)
Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35
In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan-

nels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :
(2 ×16)+ 3 = 35 (decimal)
Error rate =28H or less
(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less) Fig. 10
Important
After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)
<Change to an AUDIO error rate>

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CS Function ADDR MODE DT
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 10 001D ST 00 →03 Product setting
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD 03 Audio error rate indication
Remarks) Selecting DT back to "0"makes a return to Audio + Video error rate.
8
MVX3i E
4-2 Mechanical Error Indication

<Outline>
(1) On occurrence of a mechanical error, the conditions of the error can be checked in the service mode.
(2) In the normal indication mode of the mechanical error, two types of indications appear on the service mode initial screen: the data
indication retained only by the main battery and the error history data indication backed up by LITHIUM 3V.
(3) The data backed up by the LITHIUM 3V can be reset by the STEP-1 operation shown below.
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 08 0008 ST 00 Error data held only in the POWER-ON
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD ↑ state is indicated.
2 1) Shift to normal mode, and turn off power. Setting cancellation.
4-3 Cleaning Mode

When cleaning the head with hard-type cleaning tape (DY9-1384-000), set up the cleaning mode according to the procedure given
below.
Note : After head cleaning, be sure to restore the settings to normal.
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 10 0111 ST --
2) Increases DT by 2. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ --
(Change bit-02 to 1 from 0.)
(Example: 80 → 82)
3) Perform ST ORE. (Press PAUSE key.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- Completion of cleaning mode setup
2 1) Change over to the normal mode and turn OFF the power supply. Resetting of cleaning mode
9
MVX3i E
4-4 Commands Particular to Camera

<Outline>
(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation.
(2) Make preparation according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to camera.
(3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the “ST” mode.
Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.
CAM SPECIAL COMMAND CS Function ADDR MODE DT
WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3300 ST --
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- WB is set.
WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3301 ST --
LOCK 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- WB is locked.
T URBO 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- WB high-speed setting mode
OUT DOOR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- WB outdoor mode
INDOOR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- WB indoor mode
IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3305 ST --
OPEN 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- T he iris is opened forcibly.
IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3306 ST --
CLOSE 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- T he iris is closed forcibly.
AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3307 ST --
MAX 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- A value of AGC gain is maximized.
AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3308 ST --
MIN 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- A value of AGC gain is minimized.
COLOR 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3309 ST --
BAR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- Outputs color bar from DIGIC DV.
White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330A ST --
100% 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- Outputs white 100% from DIGIC DV.
White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330B ST --
50% 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- Outputs white 50% from DIGIC DV.
Flashing 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3315 ST --
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) ↑ ↑ ↑ RD -- Flashing occurs
10
MVX3i E
4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting

<Generals>
(1) Setting the address according to the table below allows to check whether the lens resetting is ended or not.
(2) If the DATA (in hexadecimal representation) is D0 or D4, the lens has been reset.
* In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset.
* In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset.
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3100 RD -- RAM data indication
Fig. 11
4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches

<Generals>
(1) The CCM and FR MI-COM terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the
connections between the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state.
(2) Perform the check in the RD mode.
4-6-1 CCM MI-COM Input Port
PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR DATA BIT Remark

T1 FOCUS Focus Ring 1 01 000A 1
T2 FOCUS Focus Ring 1 01 000A 4
J1 Network Mode SW Network mode SW 1 01 0017 2
V13 Li3V Detect Lithium battery low voltage detection 1 01 000E 3
N3 EJECT SW Eject detection 1 01 0019 3
N2 Cassette IN SW Cassette IN detection 1 01 0019 2
R13 Photo SW Photo SW full press 1 01 000E 6
T13 Half Photo SW Photo SW half press 1 01 000E 5
U13 ST ART /ST OP T rigger SW 1 01 000E 4
N1 DC J DET DC Jack detection 1 01 0019 1
M4 VT R POWER ON VT R mode SW 1 01 0019 7
M3 CAM POWER ON Camera mode SW 1 01 0019 6
N4 T /C PW SW T ape/Card SW 1 01 0019 4
B13 USB DET USB detection 1 01 0014 2
E13 CARD DET 1 Card detection 1 01 0014 5
C14 CARD WP1 Card record inhibit 1 01 0014 6
11
MVX3i E
4-6-2 CCM MI-COM A/D Port
PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR AD DATA(00∼FF) Remark

A3 Batt A/D Battery voltage 1 02 0008 Battery voltage level
B3 Batt Info A/D Battery type 1 02 0009 00 ∼33 34 ∼65 66 ∼99 9A∼CDCE∼FF
Batt BP-535 BP-522 BP-511 BP-508
Not /512
A4 A/D V Charge voltage 1 02 000B Cannot be observed
C3 A/D I Charge current 1 02 000A Cannot be observed
C5 KEY AD0 KEY A/D0 1 02 0002 00 ～2C : Menu,
2D～67 : Setting execution,
68 ～A7 : P.SET cont. Right,
A8 ～DB : P.SET cont. Left
A6 KEY AD1 KEY A/D1 1 02 0003 00 ～2C : Stop,
2D～67 : Card Mix,
68 ～A7 : Recording/Pause
B6 KEY AD2 KEY A/D2 1 02 0004 00 ～2C : Rew,
2D～67 : Play/Pause,
68 ～A7 : FF
C6 KEY AD3 KEY A/D3 1 02 0005 00 ～2C : P.SET cont. execution,
2D～67 : P.SET cont. T op,
68 ～A7 : P.SET cont. Under,
A8 ～DB : Audio Level
D6 KEY AD4 KEY A/D4 1 02 0006 00 ～2C : D.Effect ON/OFF,
2D～67 : Effect Select,
68 ～A7 : Focus A/M,
A8 ～DB : Custom key
E7 EXP KEY EXP KEY 1 02 000C 00 ～2C : EXP down,
2D～67 : EXP up,
68 ～A7 : EXP lock
E8 ZOOM KEY Zoom KEY output 1 02 0016 T ELE WIDE
A8 IENC Iris ENC output 1 02 0014 Close Open
E9 T EMP T emperature sensor 2 08 3130 2-Byte display
4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port
PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR DATA BIT Remark

P07 EXT DET External MIC detection (Audio C) 0 01 0000 7
P02 AV DET AV Jack detection 0 01 0000 2
P06 S DET S detection 0 01 0000 6
R4 REC PROOF T ape record inhibit 0 01 000A 4
12
MVX3i E
4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port
PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR AD DATA(00∼FF) Remark

SHOE ID1 AA Shoe ID1 0 02 000E
CASE IN Cassette detection 0 02 000C Cassette found Cassette not found
PANEL Open SW LCD open detection 0 02 000A Close Open
PANEL B/T SW LCD invert detection 0 02 000B Invert Normal
Y GYRO Yaw gyro output 0 02 0005
P GYRO Pitch gyro output 0 02 0004
DEW AD Dew detection 0 02 0003
MSW AD Mechanism position 0 02 0002
T APE END T ape end detection 0 02 0001
T APE T OP T ape beginning detection 0 02 0000
13
MVX3i E
5. Service Hints
5-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards

The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.
CVF P.C.B.
FLASH P.C.B.
LJ-1 P.C.B. SJACK P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
GY P.C.B.
R KEY P.C.B.
LJ-2 P.C.B.
DC P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
Fig.12
14
MVX3i E
5-2 Location of Main Elements
MAIN P.C.B. IC2302 IC2000 IC2301 IC400 IC2303

SDRAM VRP2 VIC3 MPEG4 DUAL FLASH IC3500
USB I/F
IC103 IC3501
CCM MI-COM CMOS LOGIC
IC1000
CDS/AD
IC1103
SDRAM
IC3201
DC/DC CONVERTER IC803
CONTROL 4V REGULATOR
IC1801
OPE AMP
IC404 IC105 IC1102 IC1101

CMOS LOGIC 16M FLASH DIGIC DV SDRAM
IC1002 IC1001 IC301 IC1004 IC300 IC1203 IC1205 IC100

MPX TG OPE AMP 72MHz MOTOR DRIVE OPE AMP OPE AMP 2.5V REGULATOR
X'tal OSC
IC1501
EVF DRIVE
IC1301
MOTOR DRIVE IC2101
IC1003
4.6V REGULATOR VIF2
IC801 IC101
AUDIO INTERFACE BACKUP
IC802 IC102
SP DRIVER RESET
IC1601 IC1603 IC104 IC3202 IC3204

MOTOR DRIVE OPE AMP CMOS LOGIC 4.7V REGULATOR 3.3V REGULATOR
IC1602
D/A CONVERTER FU3206 FU3207
IC1005 IC1006 FU3205 FU3201

CMOS LOGIC CMOS LOGIC
IC1202
D/A CONVERTER FU3203 FU3202
FU1801
FU3204
IC1201 IC1200
IRIS DRIVE 4.6V REGULATOR
Fig. 13
15
MVX3i E
CCD P.C.B.
IC1005 IC1004 IC1003 IC1002
V-DRIVER CMOS LOGIC CMOS LOGIC CMOS LOGIC
IC1006 IC1001 IC1000

OPE AMP OPE AMP CCD
LJ-2 P.C.B. GY P.C.B.

IC1691
P SENSOR GYRO
IC1611
Y SENSOR GYRO
LCD P.C.B.
IC902
LCD DRIVER
IC901 IC4201
EEPROM DC/DC CONVERTER
CONTROL
Fig. 14
16
MVX3i E
5-3 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.
Measurement condition : Product status, camera auto mode(AF,IS OFF), LCD ON (Approx. 0.2A each smaller in case of CVF)
Preset voltage : 7.4V
POWER SW MODE Current consumption (A)

CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.75 A
REC 0.79 A
VCR STOP 0.52 A
PLAY 0.61 A
POWER OFF 0.85 µA
17
MVX3i E
6. Trouble Shooting
To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
6-1 Power Supply

<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.
Main power is connected. → UNREG is supplied to the MAIN P.C.B. → CCM MI-COM starts up. → CCM MI-COM outputs VCR ON
“H” signal. → PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. → Establishes communication with the FR MI-COM. → FR MI-
COM initializes recorder mechanical chassis. → After initialized, the CCM MI-COM is brought into the standby status with the VCR
ON changed to VCR Low.
After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures.
Power supply mode switch operation → After CCM MI-COM is accepted, VCR ON “H” is output. → The PWM driver is started to turn
on various power supplies. → The FR MI-COM is started to control the system.
<Check Points>
1) Key Inputs
Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode.
2) Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication
If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indi-
cated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.
3) Error in Mechanism (p. 9)
If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.
At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in the
SERVICE mode.
4) VCR ON “H”, CAM ON “H” (control signal from CCM MI-COM) Outputs
5) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
Check the continuity of the fuses FU3201, 3202, 3203, 3204, 3205, 3206, 3207 and 1801 on the MAIN P.C.B. In case of NG,
replace the fuse and check the power consumption.
6) Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.
18
MVX3i E
6-2 Camera Picture Faulty

<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.
CCD → MAIN P.C.B. (DIGIC DV → VIC3→VIF2) → S JACK P.C.B. / LJ-2 P.C.B.
<Check Points>
1) Check of lens reset (p. 11)
If the display freezes showing the opening image, check if the lens has been reset by means of the service mode. In case of NG,
check the lens.
2) Check of blue back output
If the blue back is confirmed, the signal line subsequent to VIC3 is considered to be OK.
3) Check of DIGIC DV generation signal (white 100% or color bar) (p. 10)
The white 100% or color bar signals are generated by the DIGIC DV on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, if the output of the
white 100% or color bar signal is attained, the signal line subsequent to DIGIC DV is considered to be OK.
4) Check of CCD output
The CCD output is sampled by IC1000 (CDS/AD). Check the signal.
5) Check by command particular to camera (p. 10)
Check the operation of White balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the service mode.
19
MVX3i E
6-3 Faulty of Playback Picture

<Hints>
In the DV, degradation of picture quality normally appears on the screen as block noise. This is because, if an error occurs exceeding the
ability of the error correction circuit, the block by block information of pictures is not played back properly and thus complemented by
the previous picture information. Normally, such block noise appears on the screen when the error rate has considerably been degraded
due to the degraded tape or the lowered head output, etc. Be sure to check the playback picture quality by the error rate.
<Check Points>
1) Deterioration of Tape Quality
Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.
2) Error Rate (P. 8)
In the service mode, check an error rate of self-recording/LP playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 × 10-5.
In case of NG, take the following procedure.
(1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment.

(2) Run a cleaning tape.
Use the cleaning tape of hard type (DY9-1384-000).
[Playback time]
After replacement of the drum unit → 25 seconds
For cleaning → 25 seconds per time, Up to three times
* Do not play the cleaning tape back for 25 seconds or more continuously.
* The total playback time of a cleaning tape is five minutes at the maximum.
* When using hard-type cleaning tape, select the cleaning mode on the product main unit.
(Refer to 4-3 - Cleaning Mode, p.9.)
(3) Check the error rate again.

If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened with
alcohol.
* Take care not to damage the head.
* Do not touch the head with bare hand.
(4) Check the error rate again.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use a
tape (must be Panasonic LP tape) which has been purchased at a different time. The error rate may become worse due to
inconsistent quality or aging of the tape.
(5) Repeat playing back the cleaning tape until error rate is improved.
* However, the total playback time of cleaning tape should not exceed 5 minutes.
20
MVX3i E
6-4 Startup Window Setting

In the startup screen [User Setting 1, 2], a default image has been contained at the factory prior to shipment. When the user writes
an original image over it in the User Setting, it becomes a default image after replacement of the MAIN P.C.B. Note that the image
thus written by the user is recognized as a non-original image.
Procedure)
How to save an original image to a PC and write it to the main unit:
(1) In the MyCamera window on the Zoom Browser EX, save original image data to a PC.
(2) Replace the MAIN P.C.B.
(3) In the MyCamera window, set the original image data saved at step (1) to the camera.
For details, refer to the DIGITAL VIDEO SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL - “Customizing Your Camcorder with
the MyCamera Settings”.
Note)
Only where the USB I/F is available for connection between the PC and main unit, it is allowed to save/write original image data
using the Zoom Browser EX.
21
DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1-2 Separating the Accessory Shoe --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
1-3 Separating the Top Cover Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
1-4 Separating the Right Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
1-5 Separating the Rear Cover Unit and CVF Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
1-6 Separating the Camera and Recorder Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
1-7 Separating the Camera Unit and MF Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
1-8 Separating the MAIN P.C.B. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
1-9 Separating the Recorder Unit, Main Holder and DC P.C.B. --------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
1-10 Separating the Flash Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12
1-11 Disassembling the Left Cover Unit - 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
1-12 Disassembling the Left Cover Unit - 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
1-18 Disassembling the Flash Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
1-19 Disassembling the Right Cover Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
1-23 Disassembling the Rear Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 27
1-24 Disassembling the MF Unit - 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
1-25 Disassembling the MF Unit - 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29
1-26 Disassembling the LCD Unit - 1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
1-30 Disassembling the CVF Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
1-33 Disassembling the Camera Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 38
1-34 Disassembling the Camera Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 39
1-35 Disassembling the Lens Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
1-36 Disassembling the Lens Unit - 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41
1-37 List of Screws Used ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 42
1-38 List of Disassembly Photos ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43
2. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 45
2-1 Adjustment Procedures in Part Replacement --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 45
2-1-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 45
2-1-2 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 47
2-2 CCD Section (1) - CCD Image Adjustment - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
2-2-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
2-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
2-2-3 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (1) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
2-2-4 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (2) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
2-2-6 CCD Image Adjustment (Low Temperature) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
2-2-7 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check (Low Temperature) ----------------------------------------------------------- 52
2-3 AF Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
2-3-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
2-3-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
2-4 IS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
2-4-1 Hall Element Gain Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
2-4-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
2-4-3 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
2-4-4 Luminance Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 60
2-4-5 EEPROM Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 60
2-5 CCD Section (2) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 61
2-5-2 CCD Image Adjustment (High Temperature) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 61
2-5-3 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
2-5-4 CCD Pixel Missing Correction -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
2-6 Camera Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65
2-6-1 Iris Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65
2-6-2 WB Adjustment (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65
2-6-3 Color Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
2-6-4 WB Adjustment (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
2-6-5 WB Adjustment (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
2-6-6 EEPROM Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67
2-6-7 Color Balance Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67
2-7 Recorder Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
2-7-1 Y LEVEL Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 68
2-7-2 C LEVEL Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 69
2-7-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
2-7-4 SWP Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 70
2-7-5 C. FG Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
2-7-6 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
2-7-7 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
2-7-8 LCD P.C.B. Setting for Destination -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
2-8 Tape Path Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 72
MVX3i E
1. Disassembling and Reassembling

Notes :
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.
(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure
diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.
• Lateral engaging connector • Lengthwise engaging connector

( The instructions are given in the disassembly proce- ( The instructions are given in the disassembly proce-
dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)
: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side) Indicated by →. Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the
∗ : Contacts are positioned upward. shafts indicate the noncontacts.
Metal contact (Pins' face down)

Metal contact
Metal contact (Pins' face up)

Metal contact
:
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8011-000)

(4) If any part to be replaced has UL tape attached on it, be sure to reattach UL tape at the same position in reassembling.
(5) After removing R Cover Unit, be sure to discharge the main capacitor.
(Exercise care not to receive an electric shock due to a high voltage in the FLASH P.C.B. )
(6) Notes of the new type connector (MAIN P.C.B. CN2952 etc.)
Open the Cover Housing of the Connector.
Procedure : Hook your finger on the Cover Housing of the Connector as shown in the illustration and open the Cover
Housing upward.
Cover Finger
Rotating
direction
Note : The Cover Housing will stop at the position where it is opened about 120 degrees. If you make an attempt
to open it further, extra force will be applied so that the Cover Housing may be damaged. Be careful not to
damage it.
Also, when you operate the Cover, some Contacts are protruding from the Cover (portions marked by *).
Be fully careful not to touch the protruded portions. (Be fully careful of this point throughout all works of
operating Cover, inserting FPC and removing FPC.)
1
MVX3i E
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.
(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.
START : MAIN FLOW

: SUB FLOW
1-2 Accessory Shoe : MAIN UNIT
1-3 Top Cover Unit 1-3 Zoom Photo Key Ass'y
1-4 Right Cover Unit 1-19 CKEY FPC Ass'y
1-21 R-KEY P.C.B.
1-22 Lower Right Cover Ass'y
1-5 Rear Cover Unit 1-30 CVF Hinge Ass'y 1-24 MF Ring Ass'y
1-5 CVF Unit 1-32 CVF P.C.B. 1-24 MF Base Ass'y
1-6 Camera Recorder Unit 1-7 MF Unit 1-25 MF FPC Ass'y
1-7 Camera Unit 1-33 Lens Unit
1-8 MAIN P.C.B. 1-34 CCD P.C.B.
1-9 Recorder Unit
1-10 Flash Unit 1-18 Flash P.C.B.
1-10 Left Cover Unit 1-12 Power SW Ass'y
1-13 Speaker Ass'y
1-13 S Jack P.C.B.
1-14 L FPC Ass'y
1-14 Junction FPC
1-15 LJ-1 P.C.B.
1-16 LJ-2 P.C.B.
1-16 LJ-2 MAIN FPC Ass'y
1-17 GY P.C.B.
1-17 Cassette Arm Ass'y
1-21 LCD Unit 1-27 LCD P.C.B.
1-28 Back Light Ass'y
1-28 LCD Ass'y
END 1-28 LCD Hinge Unit
2
MVX3i E
1-2 Separating the Accessory Shoe

(1) Remove the Shoe Cover.
(2) Remove four screws (a × 4), and detach the Accessory Shoe.
Shoe Cover
(2) - a (1)
Accessory Shoe
(2)
a
5mm
Metal
M1.7
Flat Head Screw
Fig. 1
3
MVX3i E
1-3 Separating the Top Cover Unit

(1) Open the LCD Unit and L Jack 2 Cover. Remove four screws (b × 2, p × 2), and disconnect CN11. Detach the Top Cover Unit from
the front side first.
(2) Remove one screw (c × 1), and detach the Zoom Photo Key Ass’y.
<Note on Reassembling>
(1) For mounting the Top Cover Unit, first engage the rear section with the Claw part on the top of Rear Cover.
Zoom Photo Key

Ass'y
Top Cover
(2) (1) - b
(2) - c
(1)
CN11
(1) - b
(1) - b
L Jack 2 Cover
b
(1)
6mm
Metal
M1.7
(1) - p c
(1) 4.5mm
Metal
(1) - p M1.7
(self tap)
p
6mm
LCD Unit Metal
M1.7
NK Setscrew
Fig. 2
4
MVX3i E
1-4 Separating the Right Cover Unit

Note : Before disassembly, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor.
(Beware of electric shock because of high voltage circuit.)
(1) As illustrated, prepare a Plastic Plate, introduce it into the gap A between the Main Body and Flash Unit to unlock, and open the
Flash section.
(2) Remove eight screws (b × 1, d × 6, e × 1), disconnect CN70 and CN102, and detach the Right Cover Unit.
CN102
(2) - e
(2) - d
(2) - d
(2)
(2)
(2) CN70
(2) - b
(2) - d
(2) - d
Right Cover Unit (2) - d
(1)
b d e
Plastic Plate 6mm 3mm 3mm
Metal Painted
Metal M1.7 M1.7
M1.7
1
Insert Note
Width Main Capacitor
0.3mm
2 Discharge point
Flash
P.C.B.
Parts A
Discharge resistor
about 1 kΩ SW
Fig. 3
5
MVX3i E
1-5 Separating the Rear Cover Unit and CVF Unit

(1) Open the Cassette Cover, and remove three screws (c × 1, d × 2).
(2) Raise the CVF, disconnect CN3202 and then, unhooking the section A, detach the Rear Cover Unit.
(3) Slide the CVF rearward, remove two screws (d × 2), disconnect CN1501, and detach the CVF Unit.
(1) Before mounting the Rear Cover Unit, arrange the Battery Terminal Cable away from holes for screws.
(2) After mounting the Rear Cover Unit, treat the Battery Terminal Cable as illustrated.
Note on Reassembling (1)

Engage cable with hook
Away from holes for screws (3) - d
CVF Unit
Battery (2)
Terminal Cable
Rear Cover Unit (1) - d
(3)
(2)
(1) - d
CN1501
Parts A
(1)
(2)
CN3202
It does not run aground

in a Main Holder.
(1) - c
MAIN
P.C.B.
c
Note on Reassembling (2) It does not run
4.5mm
Push the wire so aground in a
Metal Connector,
M1.7 as to be shaped
(self tap) MAIN permanently. Shield Case.
P.C.B.
d
3mm CN3202
Metal CN3202
M1.7
Fig. 4
6
MVX3i E
1-6 Separating the Camera and Recorder Unit

(1) Detach two UL tapes.
(2) Open the L Jack Cover, remove six screws (c × 1, d × 4, e × 1), disconnect CN100, CN2951, CN2952 and CN2953, and detach the
Camera and Recorder Unit.
Note : (1) Apply force on the stoppers for CN2952 uniformly so as not to break.
(2) When separating camera from the recorder unit, hold the MF unit and the main holder on the rear side while
letting the junction FPC and the white LED FPC go off.
L Jack 1 Holder
Left Cover, Flash Unit

(2) - e
L Jack Cover
(2) - d (2) Sheet

(2) CN100
CN2952
CN2953 (2) - d
(2)
(2)
(2) - d
(2) - c
(2) - d (1)
(2)
UL Tape
Camera, Recorder Unit
CN2951
(2)
(1)
(2) - d
UL Tape
c d e
4.5mm 3mm 3mm (2) - d
Metal Metal Painted
M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 5
7
MVX3i E
(1) Before mounting the Camera and Recorder Unit on the Left Cover Unit, bend the section A inward so that the Sheet will not
interfere with the L Jack 1 Holder.
(2) After mounting the Camera and Recorder Unit, fasten the Junction FPC on the illustrated position using Double-Faced Tape.
(3) With UL Tape, fasten the sponge of Ferrite Core at the illustrated position so as to be in the Left Cover.
(4) Secure the MIC Cable with UL tape as illustrated.
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)
Bend inward
Double-Faced
Parts A Tape
Sheet
Junction FPC
LJ2-MAIN FPC Ass'y
UL Tape
UL Tape (9 × 45)
House the Sponge in

Left Cover
MIC Cable
Left Cover
Fig. 6
8
MVX3i E
1-7 Separating the Camera Unit and MF Unit

(1) Disconnect CN701 and CN1601, remove one screw (d × 1), and detach the MF Unit.
(2) Remove three screws (c × 1, o × 2), disconnect CN1000 (B to B), CN1200 and CN1602, and detach the Camera Unit.
Note : Disconnect CN1000 (B to B) holding it at two points for preventing the FPC from breaking.
(1) Mount the GND Wire on the position indicated in the figure.
(2) For mounting the MF Unit, engage the sections A and B.
Camera Unit (2)

(2) - c
GND Wire
CN1000
(B to B)
(1)
CN1602
(2)
CN1200
(1) c
MF Unit 4.5mm
(1) - d
(1) CN1601 Metal
M1.7
CN701 (self tap)
o d
(1) - d (2) - o
3mm 3mm
(2) - o
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
NK Setscrew
Note Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)

Note : Hold 2 points on Pass through concave on
MF Unit
Connector for disengaging Plate as viewed on left
UL Tape
Plate
GND
Wire
A
DC cable is not running
aground into this portion. B
Fig. 7
9
MVX3i E
1-8 Separating the MAIN P.C.B.

(1) Disconnect CN300, CN301, CN302, CN303, CN2001 and CN3201, remove three screws (d × 3), and detach the Main P.C.B.
(2) From the Main P.C.B., take out the HA Shield, PM1 Shield and PM2 Shield.
(3) Disconnect CN103, and remove the R-MAIN FPC.
(1) Fasten the DC Cable on the illustrated position using UL Tape.
(2) Do not mistake the mounting orientation for the R-MAIN FPC.
(3) Insert the MAIN P.C.B. into Part A of the Main Holder to fasten it.
Note on Note on Reassembling (2)

Reassembling (3)
MAIN P.C.B. to R-KEY PCB
HA Shield R-MAIN FPC

CN103
R-MAIN FPC
(2) CN301
A
CN103
A
(3)
CN2001
(2) CN300
CN302
CN303 (1) - d
PM1 Shield (1) - d
CN3201
(1)
(2)
PM2
d MAIN P.C.B.
(1) - d Shield
3mm
Metal
M1.7
Note on Reassembling (1) Pass between IC and Connector (Take care not to cover the IC 1002.)
UL Tape
IC1002 Pass between
CN1601 IC and PM2 Shield
Pass between
Connectors PM2 Shield
Push so as not to
project rearward
UL Tape CN2951 CN2900 Must not ride on PM2 Shield
Fig. 8
10
MVX3i E
1-9 Separating the Recorder Unit, Main Holder and DC P.C.B.

(1) Unsolder three points, remove one screw (d × 1), and detach the DC P.C.B., DC Cable and Rubber.
(2) Remove three screws (f × 3), and detach the Insulation Rubber Part (× 3), Spring Plate and Main Holder.
(3) Remove the Sheet and Cushion from the Main Holder.
(1) Mount the Sheet and Cushion on the illustrated positions.
(2) For preventing the Spring Plate from turning, engage its Claw part with the hole of Recorder Holder.
(3) Follow the direction in the figure for soldering on the DC P.C.B.
<Instruction for Supplies>

All Insulation Rubber Parts : Hanarl FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)

Bend the lead end over 90˚ Main Holder must not project
Sheet
1.0 mm or less
DC P.C.B.
DC Cable Pass through gap of Main Holder
Mount the Rubber on

DC cable before soldering
Press until held back
Cushion
Recorder Unit Sheet
Main Holder
Main Holder
(3)
(2)
Rubber
Cushion (2) Spring Plate
(1) - d (3)
d (2) - f
3mm
Metal
(1) Rubber
M1.7 DC P.C.B.
(2) - f
Instruction for
f (2) - f Supplies
Rubber Rubber
3.4mm
Metal
M1.4 Rubber Hanarl FL-778
Steped Screw DC Cable
Fig. 9
11
MVX3i E
1-10 Separating the Flash Unit

(1) Remove one screw (c × 1), and detach the Flash Unit.
(2) Remove one screw (b × 1), and detach the Tripod Base.
Flash Unit
(1) - c
(1)
Tripod Base
Left Cover Unit

(2)
b c
6mm 4.5mm
(2) - b
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 10
12
MVX3i E
1-11 Disassembling the Left Cover Unit - 1

(1) Open the Cassette Cover, remove six screws (c × 2, d × 4), and detach the Cassette Cover, Headphone Cover, Knob and Spring.
Note : When removing the Cassette Cover, pay attention not to lose the Spring.
(1) Before mounting the Cassette Cover, set the Knob, Spring and Headphone Cover and insert the Claw part A at a status where the
Cassette Arm is open. Take care not to damage the speaker.
(1) - d
Cassette Cover
(1) - d
(1) - c
(1)
(1) - d
(1)
(1) Spring
(1) - d
(1) - c
Knob Headphone Cover

Cassette Arm Ass'y
Claw A
Spring
Knob c d
4.5mm 3mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Cassette Cover
Fig. 11
13
MVX3i E

(1) Remove the UL Tape, disconnect CN50, and detach the Power Switch Ass’y.
(2) Remove one screw (c × 1), and detach the Plate and S Jack Cover.
(3) Remove the Shaft and detach the Grip Belt.
(2) Attach UL Tape on points shown in the figure.
CN50
UL Tape
CN50 S Jack P.C.B.
(1)
(1) Power Switch Ass'y

UL Tape
Cassette Cover
(2) - c
(2)
Plate
(3)
S Jack Cover
Shaft
(2)
c
4.5mm
Metal (3)
M1.7 Grip Belt
(self tap)
Fig. 12
14
MVX3i E

(1) Disconnect CN52, and remove the Speaker Ass’y and Holder.
(2) Remove two screws (d × 2), disconnect CN51, and detach the S Jack P.C.B.
(1) Speaker Ass'y
Holder
(2) (2) - d
CN52
CN51
(1)
(2)
d
(2) - d
3mm
Metal
S Jack P.C.B. M1.7
Fig. 13
15
MVX3i E

(1) Detach the Shoe Connector from the Shoe Base by sliding it in the arrow direction upon removing one Dowel.
(2) Remove two screws (d × 1, g × 1), and detach the Shoe Base.
(3) Remove two screws (c × 1, d × 1), and detach the L FPC Ass’y.
(4) Disconnect CN1611 and CN2971, and remove the Junction FPC.
(1) Before using a service part of L FPC Ass’y, bend it at indicated positions until permanently shaped.
(2) For mounting the L FPC Ass’y, introduce it through the gap between the Left Cover and Cassette Arm and position it with two
Dowels.
Shoe Connector (2) - d
Dowel CN1611
CN2971
(1)
Shoe Base (4)
(2) (4)
(3) - d
(2) - g
(4)
(3)
(3) - c
Junction FPC
L FPC Ass'y c
4.5mm
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2) Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Folding in a Positioning
crest form Dowel Introduce in gap d
3mm
Metal
M1.7
L FPC Ass'y g
Left Cover
5.5mm
Black
L FPC Ass'y Cassette Arm Ass'y M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 14
16
MVX3i E

(1) Remove two screws (d × 2), and detach the Cassette LID.
(2) Pull out the Shaft, and remove the L Jack 2 Cover and Spring.
(3) Remove three screws (c × 1, d × 2), and detach the LJ-1 Holder and LJ-1 P.C.B.
(1) When assembling the L Jack 2 Cover, engage the Spring with the LJ-1 Holder Claw part A and L Jack 2 Cover Claw part B and then
pass the Shaft.
(2) Mount the Cassette LID at a status where the Cassette Arm is open.

Claw B
Claw A Spring
L Jack 2 Cover
(3) - d Spring
(2)
L Jack 2
LJ-1 Holder Cover
(3) - c
Shaft
(3)
(2)
LJ-1 P.C.B.
(3)
(1) - d
LJ-1 Holder
(1)
(1) - d
Cassette LID
c d
4.5mm 3mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 15
17
MVX3i E

(1) By tweezers or the like, remove the Claw part A, and detach the LED Cap, LED Lens and LED Holder.
Note : Do not scratch nor contaminate the LED Lens.
(2) Disconnect CN2961, and remove the LJ-2 MAIN FPC Ass’y.
(3) Remove four screws (c × 1, d × 3), and detach the LJ-2 Holder, GND Plate 2 and LJ-2 P.C.B.
Claw A (3) - d
(1)
LED Cap
LED Lens
LED Holder
LJ-2 P.C.B.
(3) - d
(3) - d
CN2961
(2)
(3)
(3)
c d
LJ-2 MAIN FPC Ass'y GND Plate 2 4.5mm 3mm
Metal
Metal M1.7
LJ-2 Holder M1.7
(self tap)
(3) - c
Nort on Reassembling (1)
Protrusion from the end of the

MIC Jack: 1 mm or less
Make folding if it is more than 1mm.
LJ-2 P.C.B.
UL Tape (9 × 20)
Cover the Jack
Terminal part.
Take care not
to Cover the LED.
Not protruded
from the end of the Jack.
Fig. 16
18
MVX3i E

(1) Remove three screws (c × 1, d × 2), and detach the GY Holder, GY P.C.B., GND Plate and L Jack Cover.
(2) Remove one screw (c × 1), and detach the Cassette Arm Ass’y.
Note : Mount or demount the Cassette Arm Ass’y at an open status.
(3) Remove one screw (c × 1), and detach the Tally Cover.

Part of GY Holder Plate Spring got in contact with Cassette Arm Ass’y : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Sliding part of Cassette Arm Ass’y : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
C lock hook part of Cassette Arm Ass’y : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Knob support face of Cassette Arm Ass’y : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Tally Cover
(1)
(3) - c
(3)
L Jack Cover
(1)
GND Plate
GY Holder
(1) - c
GY P.C.B.
(1) (1) - d
(2)
Instruction for Supplies
GY Holder
(2) - c
Knob
support face C Lock Hook
Cassette Arm Ass'y Apply
Hanarl
KS-39M
Sliding part
c d Apply
4.5mm 3mm Hanarl KS-39M
Metal Metal
M1.7 Cassette Arm
M1.7
(self tap) Ass'y Apply Hanarl KS-39M
Fig. 17
19
MVX3i E
1-18 Disassembling the Flash Unit

Note : Before the work, be sure to discharge the Main Capacitor. (See “1-4 Separating the Right Cover Unit”.)
(1) Introduce a Plastic Plate into section A to open the Flash section.
(2) Disconnect CN501, and remove the Flash FPC.
(3) Remove two screws (h × 2), and detach the Flash Cover.
(4) Remove one screw (q × 1), unsolder eight points and separate the Flash P.C.B., Flash Ass’y and Main Capacitor.
(1) Coat soldered points with Dia Bond 1663G (CY9-8129-000). Treat the wiring as illustrated.
(2) Treat the leads of Flash Ass’y as illustrated.

Soldered points : Dia Bond 1663G (CY9-8129-000)
Plastic Plate
1 Flash Cover
Insert
Width
0.3mm 2 (1)
Parts A
(3) Main Capacitor
Flash Ass'y
(4)
(4) Flash P.C.B.

(3) - h
h q
4mm 4mm (2)
Gury Metal CN501
Painted M1.7 Flash FPC
M1.7 (self tap)
(self tap) (4) - q
(4) Points to unsolder Note on Reassembling (2)

Note on Reassembling (1) Soldered parts : Dia Bond1663G
Red
Black
Blue Pink
Black White The leads between the light-emitting
Wire the leads away from part and the soldered part on
this area the P.C.B. should not be entangled
with or overlaid on one another.
Fig. 18
20
MVX3i E
1-19 Disassembling the Right Cover Unit - 1

(1) Open the LCD, and remove the Lithium Battery Cover.
(2) Remove eight screws (c × 5, d × 3), disconnect CN72, and detach the R GND Plate 4, CKEY FPC Ass’y, Holder, CKEY Button and
Under GND Plate.
(3) Raise the DE FPC, remove three screws (c × 2, g × 1), and detach the GND Plate 2.
LCD
Lithium
Battery
(1)
Cover CKEY
Button
(2) CKEY FPC
Ass'y
R GND Plate 4
(1)
(2) - c
(2) - d
(3)
CN72 (2) - d
(2) - d
DE FPC
(2)
UL Tape
(3) (2) - c
(3) - g (2) - c
(3) - c
GND Plate 2 Holder
(3) - c
c d g Under GND Plate
3mm (2) - c
4.5mm 5.5mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 Black
M1.7 M1.7
(self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 19
21
MVX3i E
(1) Attach CKEY Tape on points shown in the figure.
(2) When mounting the SW part of the CKEY FPC Ass’y, open the LCD and engage the SW part with two dowels. Then, secure the
SW part with its screws. After tightening the screws, make sure that the SW part is not unseated from the dowels. Attach UL Tape
as illustrated.
(3) When mounting the GND Plate 2, engage sections A and B.
(4) Run the DE FPC along the GND plate 2 as illustrated.
Nort on Reassembling (1) Nort on Reassembling (3)
CKEY Tape CKEY FPC Ass'y
A
Align with the pattern edge.
Attachment reference : ±1 mm
Align with the SW edge.
GND Plate 2
Take care not to extend onto the SW
Attachment reference : -1 mm
Nort on Reassembling (2) Nort on Reassembling (4)
CKEY FPC Ass'y Switch parts

UL Tape
Tighten the screws with
the SW part engaged
with the Dowels.
After tightening the screws, DE FPC
make sure that the
SW part is no unseated
from the Dowels.
GND Plate 2
A clearance should be
provided here.
Fig. 20
22
MVX3i E
(5) For attaching the DSW FPC, open the LCD and then attach the DSW FPC with UL Tape without engagement on Dowels as
illustrated. After attaching the DSW FPC, engage it with the Dowels. Check that it has been attached in the specified allowable
range.

Dowel
downward Provide parallelism

(skewed inclination,
downward protrusion,
and bowing are not allowed).
Folding line of R GND plate 4

Reference of attachment
The check of tolerance level (Downward protrusion is not allowed.)
Dowel Reference for
attachment on
board at end
8810-3GD
Protrusion
from this
range is not
allowed.
8810-3GD
UL Tape
(9 × 20)
Fix the position aligning the center of
the first character with the dotted line.
Be sure not to allow the second
character being a bit beyond the dotted
line to the left.
Fig. 21
23
MVX3i E

(1) Remove two screws (c × 2), and detach the Hinge Inner Cover.
(2) Remove one screw (c × 1), and detach the GND Plate 1.
(1) For mounting the Hinge Inner Cover, hold the Hinge Cable by Pin as illustrated for wiring treatment.
(2) Mount the Hinge Inner Cover inserting its two ends A into the Right Cover. Also, do not pinch the Hinge Cable.
GND Plate 1 Note on Reassembling (2)

Hinge Inner Cover
(2) Hinge Inner Cover
(2) - c
(1)
A
(1) - c
c
4.5mm
Metal
(1) - c M1.7
(self tap)
CN71
CN71
CN74 CN74
CN73
CN73
Pin Pin
Fig. 22
24
MVX3i E

(1) Remove one screw (c × 1), disconnect CN71, CN73 and CN74, and detach the R-KEY P.C.B. and R Button.
(2) Remove two screws (g × 2), rotate the LCD by 90°, and detach the LCD Unit and R GND Plate 3.
(1) Before mounting the R-KEY P.C.B., open the SD Cover. Mount it by inserting it into two points A on the bottom of Right Cover.
LCD Unit (2) - g
90˚ rotate
(2)
(2) - g
(2) - g
R GND Plate 3
(2)
(2)
(2) - g
A
(1) CN71
A CN74
(1)
R Button CN73
(1) - c
R-KEY P.C.B.
c g
4.5mm 5.5mm
Metal Black
SD Cover M1.7 M1.7
Open (self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 23
25
MVX3i E

(1) Remove four screws (c × 4) and gradually detach the Lower Right Cover Ass’y starting at the front.
Note : Hold the SD Cover section beforehand because the SD Cover, Shaft and Spring will come off together with the
Lower Right Cover Ass’y.
(2) Remove the SD Cover, Shaft and Spring from the Lower Right Cover Ass’y.
(1) Fasten the Spring provided inside with the Shaft onto the concave section of the SD Cover and mount it on the Lower Right Cover
Ass’y. Then, holding the SD Cover, mount the Lower Right Cover Ass’y on the Right Cover. Securely insert two positioning
Dowels.

Parts of SD Cover lock claw : Hanarl FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
Dowel
Hanarl FL-778
Apply HANAL to
both sides of the
lock tab part.
SD COVER
Dowel
(1) Lower Right Cover Ass'y
(1) - c
UL Tape
(2)
(2)
SD Cover
(1) - c
c
(1) - c
Spring 4.5mm
Metal
Shaft UL Tape M1.7
(1) - c (self tap)
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2) UL Tape

SD Cover SD Cover
Throw down
Shaft
Spring Positioning
<< After mounting >>
reference
Fig. 24
26
MVX3i E
1-23 Disassembling the Rear Cover Unit

(1) Remove four screws (k × 4), and detach the Battery Terminals.
(2) Unsolder four points to remove the Cable 6P.
(3) Remove the Lock Knob and Spring.
(1) Pay attention to the arrangement of Battery Terminals.
For soldering, follow the directions shown in the figure.

All Springs : Hanarl FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)

All springs
(3)
Hanarl FL-778 Lock Knob
Calbe 6P Spring
(2)
Solder
Solder
(1) - k
k
(1) - k 3.5mm
(1)
(1) - k Metal
(1) - k M1.7
(self tap)
Battery Terminal
Note on Reassembling (1) Solder must not Solder must not

project project
Soldering
Soldering
Hold the cable by hook
Fig. 25
27
MVX3i E
1-24 Disassembling the MF Unit - 1

(1) Remove two screws (c × 2), and detach the MIC Shield, MIC Form and MF GND 2 Plate.
(2) Remove three screws (c × 3), and detach the MF Ring Ass’y and Pulse Ring.
Note : (1) Do not remove the FOCUS Ring from the MF Ring Ass’y.
If detached, the feeling when turning the MF Ring may change.
(2) Do not allow contaminants, etc. to enter the MF Ring Ass’y interior nor Pulse Ring mounting section.
(1) For mounting the MF Ring Ass’y, mount the Pulse Ring upon engaging its Dowel A with corresponding hole A and its Dowel B
with corresponding hole B.
(2) Make sure the entire surface of the Pulse Ring and mounting section are free from foreign matters, contaminants, etc.
(3) After tightening the screws (c × 3) on the MF Ring Ass’y, be sure to check the rotation of the Ring section (with friction and without
locking).
(2) - c
MF Base Ass'y
(2) - c
(2) - c
Pulse Ring
(2)
MF Ring Ass'y
(1)
(1)
MF GND 2 Plate
MIC Form
(1)
(1) - c c
4.5mm
Metal
MIC Shield M1.7
(1) - c (self tap)

Dowel B
Dowel B
Pulse
Ring
MF Ring Ass'y Dowel A
(1) Hole B
(2) MF Base Ass'y

Hole A
Fig. 26
28
MVX3i E
1-25 Disassembling the MF Unit - 2

(1) Remove one screw (c × 1), and detach the GND Plate.
(2) Pull out the PR Press in the arrow direction, and remove the MF FPC Ass’y.
(1) Insert the section A of MF FPC Ass’y into the MF Base Ass’y and fasten section B according to the profile.
(2) Fasten section B by the PR Press.
(3) Insert two Dowels into section C and use the GND Plate for fastening. Then, make sure of no floating.
(4) Arrange the MIC Cable so that the four wires will not cross each other but be put side by side.
MF Base Ass'y (1) - c

(1) c
GND Plate 4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
MIC Cable
MF FPC Ass'y
(2)
PR Press
(2) Dowel
C
(1) - c
GND Plate
Fasten PR Press
B
A
Insert
A MF Base Ass'y
MF FPC Ass'y
Fig. 27
29
MVX3i E
1-26 Disassembling the LCD Unit - 1

(1) Remove the LCD Name Plate and LCD Badge, taking care not to scratch the LCD Top Cover.
If LCD Name Plate or LCD Badge is not replaced, need not remove LCD Plate or Badge.
(2) Remove four screws (d × 3, o × 1) and, paying attention to the Claw part A, detach the LCD Top Cover and LCD Sheet.
(1) Attach the LCD Sheet on the position indicated in the figure.
(2)
(2) - d
(2)
Claw A
LCD Sheet
(2) - o
(2) - d
(2) - d
(1)
(13.2)
(21.0)
(1)
LCD Top Cover Off-center within ±1.0
LCD Badge
4.4 ± 1.0
LCD Name Plate d o
3mm 3mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
NK Setscrew
Fig. 28
30
MVX3i E

(1) Disconnect CN901, CN902 and CN903 and unsolder two points.
(2) Remove two screws (c × 2), and detach the LCD Plate, Knob and Spring.
(3) Remove one screw (i × 1), and detach the Cushion, LCD Sheet, Bottom Cover Sheet, LCD P.C.B., LCD Shield and LCD Cushion.
LCD Shield
(3) - i LCD Sheet
CN902
(1) LCD P.C.B.
CN901 (3)
CN903
(3)
LCD Cushion
(1) Solder
(3)
(2)
(3)
(White) Solder (1)
(2)
(Red) LCD
Plate
Bottom Cover Sheet Knob
(2) - c
Cushion
Spring
c i
4.5mm 2mm
Metal
Metal M1.7
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 29
31
MVX3i E
(1) Mount the LCD Plate after the Knob and Spring.
(2) Mount the UL Tape, LCD Sheet, Bottom Cover Sheet, Cushion and LCD Cushion on the positions indicated in the figure.

Sliding part of LCD Plate : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Backlight Ass’y : Dia Bond 1663G (CY9-8129-000)
Attach the Botom Cover Sheet between ribs

LCD Cushion
LCD Sheet LCD Cushion
Solder
Pass the wires
through this gap
Dia Bond
UL Tape (9 × 20)
Away from
LCD Plate
Dia Bond
Solder
Attach the Cushion using

the silk screening as Guide
B Take care not to
A cover the elements
C A, B and C.
LCD P.C.B.
LCD Plate
KS-39M
Fig. 30
32
MVX3i E

(1) Remove the Back Light Ass’y, LCD Ass’y and GND Plate.
(2) Rotate the Hinge section 90°, and remove the Magnet.
(3) Remove one screw (i × 1), and detach the LCD Bracket.
(4) Remove the LCD Hinge Unit.
(1) Mount the Magnet with its black side toward the LCD.
LCD Hinge Unit Black side

(4)
Magnet LCD Bottom Cover
(2)
(3) (2)
LCD Bracket
(3) - i
GND Plate
(1)
LCD Ass'y
i
2mm
Metal
Back Light Ass'y M1.7
Fig. 31
33
MVX3i E

(1) Remove one screw (c × 1) and, paying attention to the Claw part A, detach the Hinge Top Cover and Hinge Bottom Cover.
(2) Remove the LCD FPC from the Hinge Top Cover.
(3) Remove the Cable 9P and Cable 12P from the Hinge Ass’y.
(1) Do not pinch the Cable nor FPC when mounting the Hinge Top Cover or Hinge Bottom Cover.
Cable 9P,12P
(3)
(1)
(1) - c
Claw A
LCD FPC
Hinge Bottom Cover

(2)
Hinge Ass'y

Hinge Ass'y
(1)
Hinge Bottom
Cover
Hinge Top Cover

Do not pinch
c the Cable
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 32
34
MVX3i E
1-30 Disassembling the CVF Unit - 1

(1) Remove the Dust Cover.
(2) Disengage the two Claw parts and unfasten the CVF-MAIN FPC.
(3) Remove four screws (c × 2, j × 2), and detach the CVF Hinge Ass’y.
(4) Pull out the CVF Hinge Ass’y. At a status where its Holder is raised, introduce tweezers as illustrated and jerk it up to disengage the
FPC Guide.
(1) Mount the CVF at a status where the CVF Hinge Ass’y is pulled out.
(2) For mounting the FPC Guide, engage the front part with a pin and push down the rear part.
Note on Reassembling (2) Dust Cover
Push down (1)
FPC Guide
(3)
(3) - j
c j
4.5mm 5.5mm
Metal Metal
CVF Hinge Ass'y M1.7 M1.7
(3) - c
(4) FPC Guide
(Be cautious about the orientation.)
(2)
FPC Guide
Claw Holder
(4)
Tweezers
Pull out
Jerk up
Fig. 33
35
MVX3i E

(1) Paying attention not to break the Flexible cable, pull out the CVF Top Cover, and remove the Frame.
(2) Remove two screws (c × 2), and detach the CVF Bottom Cover, CVF Knob and Rubber.
Note : Do not lose the Rubber.
(3) Remove the Eyepiece Rubber and then the Lens Holder.
(4) Remove the Lens from the Lens Holder.
(1) When mounting the Lens on the Lens Holder, do not mistake the side.
(2) When mounting the CVF Knob, engage the Dowel of Lens Holder as illustrated. Also, position the Rubber without fail.
(3) Bend the FPC as shown and mount the CVF Top Cover.

Rubber : Hanarl FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
CVF Inner Cover inside : Hanarl KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2) Eyepiece Rubber

CVF
Inner Cover Lens
Dowel
Rubber
Slot Lens
Lens Holder
(3)
Note on Reassembling (3) CVF Inner Cover
CVF Top Cover
(4)
(3)
FPC (1) Lens Holder

CVF
Knob (2)
Rubber
CVF Bottom Cover contact
section Hanarl FL-778 CVF Bottom Cover
(1)
CVF Top Cover (2) - c

c
Apply Hanarl KS-39M on Frame 4.5mm
8 rails on inner wall of Metal
(2) - c M1.7
CVF Inner Cover
(self tap)
Fig. 34
36
MVX3i E

(1) Disconnect CN51, and remove the CVF-MAIN FPC.
(2) Disengage two Claw parts A and CN52, and remove the CVF P.C.B.
(3) Disengage four Claw parts B, and remove a series of parts : Reflector to Mask Plate.
CVF Inner Cover
Claw B
Mask Plate
LCD Ass'y
Cushion
Diffuser
Reflector
Claw B
Claw A
(1)
(2)
(3)
CN51
(2)
CVF P.C.B.
CN52
CVF-MAIN FPC
Fig. 35
37
MVX3i E
1-33 Disassembling the Camera Unit - 1

(1) Remove the Lens Rubber.
(2) Disconnect CN100, and remove the CCD-MAIN FPC.
(3) Remove three screws (l × 3), and detach the Lens Holder and Insulation Rubbers (× 3).
(4) Remove one screw (d × 1), and detach the CCD Plate.
(5) Remove three screws (i × 3), and detach the GND Plates A and B.
(6) Remove one screw (d × 1), and detach the CCD Shield.
(1) As illustrated, position and fasten with UL Tape a Ferrite Core on the CCD-MAIN FPC. Also, shape it before mounting on the
Connector.

All Insulation Rubber : Hanarl FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
(5) (5) - i
GND Plate A (5) - i
Lens Rubber (5) - i
GND Plate B
(4) - d
(5)
(4)
(1)
CCD Plate
(6)
Rubber
(6) - d
Hanarl FL-778 (3) CN100

CCD Shield
Lens Holder
Rubber Rubber
Rubber (2)
(3) - l
CCD-MAIN FPC
(3) - l

d
3mm
Metal
M1.7
Permanently bend it outward to
curvature radius of 2 or larger UL Tape
i l
2mm 5.8mm
Metal
Pushing the Ferrite Core against M1.7 Metal
the section marked with arrow, fasten it with UL Tape M1.7
Steped Screw
Fig. 36
38
MVX3i E
1-34 Disassembling the Camera Unit - 2

(1) Remove two screws (g × 2), and detach the IR Filter, CCD Rubber and a series of parts : CCD Ass’y to CCD P.C.B.
(2) Remove one screw (d × 1), perform unsoldering, and remove the CCD P.C.B., CCD Shield B and CCD Ass’y.
(1) Before soldering, fasten the CCD Ass’y, CCD Shield B and CCD P.C.B. by one screw (d × 1).
(2) Mount the IR Filter in a correct orientation.
(2) Points to unsolder
IR Filter
CCD Rubber
CCD Ass'y
CCD P.C.B.
d g
3mm 5.5mm
Metal (2)
M1.7 Black
M1.7 (1)
(self tap)
(1) - g
IR Filter
CCD
Face thick side CCD Shield B

toward CCD side
Lens CCD P.C.B.

(2) - d
Fig. 37
39
MVX3i E
1-35 Disassembling the Lens Unit - 1

(1) Remove one screw (c × 1). Remove the UL Tape, and detach the Lens FPC parts A.
(2) Remove three screws (m × 3), and detach the Lens front section.
(3) Pull out two Guide Bars, and remove the B-V Unit.
(1) As illustrated, bend and fasten with UL Tape the FPC.

Guide Bar : Grease GE-C9 (CY9-8043-000)
(2) - m
UL Tape
(1)
(2) - m
(1) - c
Guide Bar
B-V Unit
Lens FPC
Parts A
(1)
Guide Bar
(3)
c m
4.5mm 6mm
Metal Metal
(2) M1.7 M1.7

Lens Front Parts UL Tape
Bend here (30 × 10)
GE-C9
Guide Bar
Must not interfere with boss
Fig. 38
40
MVX3i E
1-36 Disassembling the Lens Unit - 2

(1) Remove one screw (n × 1), and detach the IG Meter Ass’y.
(2) Remove one screw (c × 1) and unsolder the part (α) to detach the Lens FPC
(3) Remove the IS Ass’y.
(2) - α
(2) - c
(2) - α
(2)
Lens FPC
IS Ass'y
(2) - α
IG Meter
Ass'y (1)
(3)
(2) - α
(1) - n
c n
4.5mm 5mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
(2) - α (self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 39
41
MVX3i E
1-37 List of Screws Used
SYMBOL
SYMBOL
PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST
Flat Head Screw Self Tap

a XA1-3170-507 5mm j XA4-9170-557 5.5mm
M1.7-5.0mm (Metal) M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)
Self Tap
b XA1-7170-607 M1.7-6.0mm (Metal) 6mm k XA4-9170-357 3.5mm
M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)
Self Tap Stepped Screw

c XA4-9170-457 4.5mm l XA9-1440-000 5.8mm
Self Tap
d XA1-7170-307 M1.7-3.0mm (Metal) 3mm m XA4-9170-607 6mm
M1.7-6.0mm (Metal)
(Coated with XA1-7170-307) Self Tap

e DA3-1022-000 3mm n XA4-9170-507 5mm
M1.7-3.0mm M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
Stepped Screw NK Setscrew

f XA9-1167-000 3.4mm o XA9-0610-000 3mm
NK Setscrew
g XA4-9170-559 M1.7-5.5mm (Black) 5.5mm p XA9-1507-000 6mm
M1.7-6.0mm (Metal)
(Coated with XA4-9170-407)

Self Tap
h DA3-1021-000 Self Tap 4mm q XA1-9170-407 4mm
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal)
M1.7-4.0mm
i XA1-7170-207 M1.7-2.0mm (Metal) 2mm
42
MVX3i E
1-38 List of Disassembly Photos
Right Cover Unit Top Cover Unit
Left Cover Unit Rear Cover Unit
MF Unit Recorder Camera Unit-1
43
MVX3i E
Recorder Camera Unit-2 Recorder Camera Unit-3
Lens Unit-1 Lens Unit-2
44
MVX3i E
2. Adjustment Procedures
2-1 Adjustment Procedures in Part Replacement
2-1-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement
After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum
required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty
condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
NOTE)
(1) Before turning on power to the main unit, prepare the tools necessary for a series of adjustment steps and make setting as required.
Thus, you can perform the adjustment items in succession without having to make preparation before each adjustment item.
(2) After turning on power to the main unit, carry out the adjustment items in the order indicated in the Service Manual. Accomplish
the adjustment items successively wherever possible.
(3) Regarding item 2-5 "CCD Section (2)", determine a timing point of execution with priority given to the internal camera temperature
(for details, refer to the description of internal camera temperature check). Note, however, that 2-6 "Camera Section" should be
taken after carrying out item 2-5 "CCD Section (2)". (Item 2-5 may be carried out before items 2-3 and 2-4.)
○ : Adjustment required
Camera system
Part name
No. Adjustment item GY LJ-2 MAIN Adjustment setting
Lens CCD
PCB PCB PCB
2-2 CCD Section (1)

2-2-1 Internal Camera T emperature Check (1) ○ ○ Product condition
2-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment) ○ ○ Product condition
2-2-3 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (1) ○ ○ Setting C
2-2-4 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (2) ○ ○ Setting C
2-2-5 Internal Camera T emperature Check (2) ○ ○ Setting C
2-2-6 CCD Image Adjustment (Low T emperature) ○ ○ Setting C
CCD Image Adjustment Result Check
2-2-7 ○ ○ Setting C
(Low T emperature)
2-3 AF Section
2-3-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-3-2 Cam Correction (AUT O) ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4 IS Section
2-4-1 Hall Element Gain Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-3 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-4 Luminance Balance Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-4-5 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-5 CCD Section (2)
2-5-1 Internal Camera T emperature Check (3) ○ ○ Setting C
2-5-2 CCD Image Adjustment (High T emperature) ○ ○ Setting C
2-5-3 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check ○ ○ Setting C
2-5-4 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ○ ○ Setting C
45
MVX3i E
○ : Adjustment required
Camera system
Part name
No. Adjustment item GY LJ-2 MAIN Adjustment setting
Lens CCD
PCB PCB PCB
2-6 Camera Section

2-6-1 Iris Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-2 WB Adjustment (1) ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-3 Color Balance Adjustment ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-6 EEPROM Writing ○ ○ ○ Product condition
2-6-7 Color Balance Check ○ ○ ○ Product condition
Recorder system
Part name
No. Adjustment item MAIN DMC LCD Adjustment setting
PCB III PCB
2-7 Recorder Section

2-7-1 Y LEVEL Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-7-2 C LEVEL Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-7-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-7-4 SWP Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-7-5 C. FG Adjustment ○ ○ Product condition
2-7-6 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG ○ ○ Product condition
2-7-7 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ○ Product condition
2-7-8 LCD P.C.B. Setting for Destination ○ Product condition
DMC III
2-8 T ape Path Adjustment Setting B
46
MVX3i E
2-1-2 Indication in Service Mode
Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
3 7 4 5
9 10 6 8
Fig. 37
1. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)

2. Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA, MD, CA, CD, etc.)
3. CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F)
4. Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)
5. ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)
6. DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)
7. Data write status (0 : Read mode, 1 : Ready to write, C : Write execution)
8. DT2 : Indicate whether DT data has been written correctly in execution of STORE at the time of power-saving adjustment.
9. ST : Adjustment status (02: During adjustment, 05: Adjustment OK, 09: Adjustment NG)
10. ST2 : Adjustment status (for use in AF adjustment)
47
MVX3i E
2-2 CCD Section (1) - CCD Image Adjustment -

This camcorder is provided with a primary-color-filter CCD having 2,000,000 pixels. Since the number of CCD pixels is in-
creased, two signal processing circuits are provided for the left-side and right-side imaging areas. For eliminating a level difference
between signals on these two signal processing circuits, it is required to perform initial adjustment using a dedicated tool. The
characteristics of the CCD (sensitivity, black/white dot) largely depend on its temperature, and there are subtle differences in the
CCD characteristics due to variations in production. Therefore, carry out CCD image adjustment twice in total, i.e., at low tempera-
ture (immediately after power-on) and at high temperature (in a lapse of certain time after power-on).
2-2-1 Internal Camera Temperature Check (1)
Preparation)
(1) Provide setting C for adjustment. (The LED light source should be removed until item 2-2-3.)
(2) Before proceeding to adjustment, apply power to the CCD image adjusting tool for at least 15 minutes (in order to stabilize the light
source).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, check the internal temperature sensor in the camera.
(Be sure to perform this step immediately after power-on.)
(2) Using the internal camera temperature data, calculate a value of the current internal temperature, and record the calculated value.
Temperature immediately after power-on T1 = ____________
Note)
(1) In cases where the procedure has been interrupted, the internal camera temperature data recorded will be usable as reference data at
the time of restart.
T EMPERAT URE CHECK CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 RD 3130 00 Completion of internal camera temperature sensor
check indication.
ST : Internal camera temperature data
<How to read>
ex) 44 Hex.
44 [hex.] = 68 [dex.] (Hexadecimal-to-decimal conversion)
68 dec. - 35 = 33 [˚C]
Fixed value Current internal temperature
Fig. 38
48
MVX3i E
2-2-2 Iris Adjustment (Coarse Adjustment)

(1) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE : AUTO
AF : Closest focus
(Setting : After switching off AF, rotate the MF focus ring about one turn in the clockwise direction as
seen from the videographer.)
ZOOM : Telephoto end
Electronic zoom : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
CHART Light box (5600°K) not required

SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out iris adjustment (coarse adjustment).
IRIS CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3000 00 Iris adjustment.
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Adjustment is completed.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3001 00 Writing of iris adjustment data
49
MVX3i E
2-2-3 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (1)
SPEC. Manual adjustment
Preparation)
(1) Provide setting C for adjustment. After mounting the LED light source, turn on power to the CCD image adjusting tool.
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out light intensity adjustment for the CCD image adjusting tool.
PREPARAT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 301A 01 T ool light intensity adjustment mode
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑
(press the PAUSE button.)
2 Adjust the light intensity so that each of the R, G and B data shown in Figure 39 is 80±10.
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 301A 00 Move to normal mode.
R G B
Fig. 39
50
MVX3i E
2-2-4 Preparation for CCD Image Adjustment (2)
(1) Be sure to take the correct sequence of procedural steps in CCD image adjustment. If you take any procedural step in an unspecified
sequence or skip it over, normal adjustment will not be accomplished.
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, check the light source of the CCD image adjusting tool.
LIGHT SOURCE CHECK CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3011 -- LED light source (LED RGB) check (1)
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3012 -- LED light source (LED Flatness) check (1)
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, check the internal temperature sensor in the camera.
(Perform this step within about five minutes after power-on.)
Temperature about five minutes after power-on T2 = ____________
(3) Calculate an increase in the internal camera temperature [°C], and check that it is less than 7[°C].
Increase in internal camera temperature [°C] = T2 - T1
(4) If an increase in the internal camera temperature exceeds 7°C, turn power off and then wait until a temperature level of less than 7°C
is reached. Then, proceed to items 2-2-6 and subsequent.
Note) Remember that power cannot be disconnected just by turning off the POWER switch. Be sure to release the
service mode, and then turn off the POWER switch or unplug from the CA receptacle.
T EMPERAT URE CHECK CS Function MD ADDR DT
check indication.
2-2-6 CCD Image Adjustment (Low Temperature)
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Carry out CCD image adjustment (low temperature) in the following procedure.
CCD IMAGE ADJUST MENT CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3013 -- Image adjustment (low temperature)
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3014 -- Adjustment data writing.
51
MVX3i E
2-2-7 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check (Low Temperature)
Procedure)
(1) Check and write the result data of CCD image adjustment.
RESULT CHECK CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3017 -- Color difference check
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3018 -- Noise check
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3019 -- Check result writing
Note)
If the result of any one of the above check steps is NG, carry out the adjustment procedures starting from 2-2-1 again while strictly
maintaining the internal camera temperature within the allowable range indicated in 2-2-5. If NG is indicated repeatedly, replace
the CCD ass’y with a new one.
52
MVX3i E
2-3 AF Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) The sections 2-3-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-3-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are
performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
Also, when section 2-3-1 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 2-3-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be
executed immediately without elapse of time. If execute section 2-3-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after elapse of time
upon completion of section 2-3-1 : CZ automatic adjustment, the internal temperature will be changed and the sufficient perfor-
mance cannot be obtained.
Preparation)
(1) For CZ automatic adjustment/cam correction, set the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Tape/Card : Tape
Program AE : Auto Mode
ZOOM : Telephoto-end
CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens front
Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)
Demo mode : OFF
53
MVX3i E
2-3-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment
CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. At STEP 3, ST2 : AA should be attained. Execution of STEP 4.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode.
(3) Perform the cam correction.
CZ CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 While changing a magnification of zooming in the entire range from the telephoto end to the wide-angle end,
visually check that the chart center does not deviate significantly on the monitor T V.
Note) If a significant deviation of the chart center is found in the visual check, perform item 2-4-4 "Luminance Balance
Adjustment" (and item 2-4-5) so that the chart center will not deviate. T hen, proceed to the subsequent steps.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3110 00
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 10 Move to adjustment mode.
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3100 --
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is
(press the PAUSE button.) completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG
condition is encountered in automatic adjustment,
check the parts inside the lens section.
4 Judgment on result of adjustment 2 08 RD 3100 AA Adjustment is completed (ST 2=AA, result is OK).
Perform the cam correction.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ FF Adjustment is completed (ST 2=FF, result is NG).
T urn off the power then back on. T hen make
readjustment.
ST2
Fig. 40
54
MVX3i E
2-3-2 Cam Correction (AUTO)
CHART CZ adjustment chart

Procedure)
(1) Perform the cam correction by following the table below.
(2) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AF
OFF).
(3) If the result is NG, perform 2-3-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 2-3-2 : Cam correction (AUTO).
CAM CORRECT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 01
2 Cancel the service mode, and set the zoom position to the telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped,
turn OFF the AF function.
↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 02 Correction value measurement.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:02.
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 04 Correction value calculation.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:04.
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ AA Completion of correction value writing.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:AA.
55
MVX3i E
2-4 IS Section Adjustment
Preparation)
(1) IS adjustment is made at a product status.
(2) Prepare a tripod or stable bench.
(3) Adjusting conditions
Program AE : Auto mode
IS adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02m from lens front
(Prepare the IS adjustment chart by copying it from P.74 of this manual and use it for adjustment.)
AF : OFF
Demo mode : OFF
(4) For adjustment, set the DEMO MODE menu item to OFF beforehand.
(5) Each adjustment data (in items 2-4-1 to 2-4-4) becomes effective after completion of item 2-4-5 “EEPROM Writing”. If power
must be turned off/on in the course of each adjustment, be sure to carry out item 2-4-5 “EEPROM Writing” in advance.
<Preparation for IS adjustment>
SETTING
2.4m
IS CHART
Fig. 41
56
MVX3i E
2-4-1 Hall Element Gain Adjustment
(1) Adjusting conditions

Mode : Tape mode
Procedure)
(1) Fasten the camera and align the chart center with the monitor center.
(2) According to the following table, move the chart for aligning the circumference of chart with mark put on the monitor.
CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320A 03
2) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Ends the Hall element gain adjustment
3) Mark the center of chart on setting.
the monitor.
2 Hall element YAW gain adjustment
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3206 -- Shift Lens moves, and the chart shifts
leftward with respect to the center.
2) Perform a mode changeover. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ --
2-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3206 ADJ T he shaft lens moves to shift the chart on
the monitor rightward (or leftward) with
respect to the center.
2) Adjust DT so that the amount of horizontal ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ "ADJ"
shift of the circle will be equal to the
diameter with reference to the left-side and
right-side positions.
3) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑
4) Repeat steps 1) to 3).

If the results are OK, proceed to step 3.
(Continued to next page.)
57
MVX3i E
(Before page)
3 Hall element PIT CH gain adjustment
3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3207 -- Shift Lens moves to shift the chart
rightward with respect to the center.
2) Perform a mode changeover. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ --
3-2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3207 ADJ T he shaft lens moves to shift the chart on
the monitor upward (or downward) with
respect to the center.
2) Adjust DT so that the amount of vertical ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ "ADJ"
shift of the circle will be equal to the
diameter with reference to the top and
bottom positions.
3) Perform storing. (press the PAUSE button.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑
4) Repeat steps 1) to 3).

If the results are OK, you have reached
the end of adjustment.
58
MVX3i E
2-4-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment
SPEC. Data Writing
Procedure)
(1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below.
GYRO GAIN CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 Gyro YAW gain adjustment
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3200 77
2 Gyro PIT CH gain adjustment
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 3201 71
2-4-3 Automatic Intake of Gyro Output Data
SPEC. Automatic adjusutment
Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.
Note)
It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).
GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320D 00
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- Adjustment is completed.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with DT :05, NG with DT :09
59
MVX3i E
2-4-4 Luminance Balance Adjustment
Preparation)
(1) Adjustment condition
Mode : CARD mode
AF : OFF
Demo mode : OFF
CHART Light box (5600°K)

Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out luminance balance adjustment.
Notes)
If there is a significant deviation in the degree of vignetting, manually adjust the addresses (3204, 3205) for Hall-effect element gain
adjustment.
GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 32F0 10 CCM-MI in luminance balance adjustment mode
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Data writing.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3118 00 Focus/zoom lens returned to specified position
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Data writing. Completion of lens movement
(press the PAUSE button.) with ST 2:08
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 32F5 00 Execution of luminance balance adjustment
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Completion with DT :05, 19 PIT CH NG,
(press the PAUSE button.) 29 YAW NG, 39 PIT CH&YAW NG
2-4-5 EEPROM Writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (2-4-1 and 4) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.
EEPROM WRIT ING CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 48 ST 320F 00
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- Completion of EEPROM writing.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with DT :05, NG with DT :09
60
MVX3i E
2-5 CCD Section (2)
Preparation)
(1) Provide setting C for adjustment. (The LED light source should be removed until item 2-5-2.)
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, check the internal temperature sensor in the camera. (Perform this step about 30 to 40 minutes
after power-on.)
Temperature 30 to 40 minutes after power-on T3 = ____________
(3) Calculate an increase in the internal camera temperature [°C], and check that it is in the range of 15[°C] to 20[°C].
Increase in internal camera temperature [°C] = T3 - T1
(4) If an increase in the internal camera temperature exceeds 20°C, turn power off and then wait until a temperature level of less than
20°C is reached. Then, proceed to items 2-5-2 and subsequent.
If an increase in the internal camera temperature is less than 15°C, wait until a temperature level exceeding 15°C is reached. Then,
proceed to items 2-5-2 and subsequent.
Note) Remember that power cannot be disconnected just by turning off the POWER switch. Be sure to release the
service mode, and then turn off the POWER switch or unplug from the CA receptacle.
check indication
2-5-2 CCD Image Adjustment (High Temperature)
Procedure)
(1) Carry out CCD image adjustment (high temperature) in the following procedure.
Note)
If the knob adjusted in 2-2-3 has been turned, readjust it before proceeding to CCD image adjustment (high temperature).
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3015 -- Image adjustment (high temperature)
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3016 -- Writing of adjustment data
61
MVX3i E
2-5-3 CCD Image Adjustment Result Check
Procedure)
(1) Check and write the result data of CCD image adjustment.
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3017 -- Color difference check
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3018 -- Noise check
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3019 -- Check result writing
Note)
If the result of any one of the above check steps is NG, carry out the adjustment procedures starting from 2-5-1 again while strictly
maintaining the internal camera temperature within the allowable range indicated in 2-5-1. If NG is indicated repeatedly, replace
the CCD ass’y with a new one.
STATUS (ST) ERROR TOTAL CER NER
Fig. 42
Error Code Table for CCD Image Correction

Error No Error Conditions Error No Error Conditions
01 LED intensity low 0B RGB difference error
02 LED AE time out 0C Not used
03 Lc3 dummy leak too large 0D Shading error (horizontal slope)
04 Lc3 dummy leak ch difference too large 0E RGB absolute value insufficient
05 Not used 0F RGB absolute value is too large
06 Lc4 residual err too large 10 Chroma error between 2channels is too large
07 Lc4 residual err ch difference too large 11 Noise level difference between 2channels is
08 Lc3/lc4 slope too large too large
09 Gain correction ch difference too large 12 time out
0A Measure abort 13 range over
62
MVX3i E
2-5-4 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation
Preparation)
(1) Provide setting C for adjustment.
AF : OFF
Demo mode : OFF
Note)
(1) In this camcorder, it is possible to make correction for black dots, which is not available in the conventional models. (Maximum
allowable number of black dots : 5 points)
(2) Up to 30 pixel missing points including five black dots can be corrected. At the time of adjustment, up to 64 pixel missing points
are detectable. CCD Pixel Missing Compensation is made for up to 30 pixel missing points in increasing order of pixel missing
level. If more than 64 pixel missing points are detected in adjustment, the result of adjustment is indicated as NG and the correction
is not performed.
(3) The number of white dots increase with the temperature of the CCD, causing a change in detectable level. If the adjustment is
performed after a lapse of time longer than the specified period of power-on, the temperature of the CCD becomes higher than a
preset temperature level to result in an increase in the number of white dots detected. In this situation, CCD Pixel Missing
Compensation cannot be made properly.
(4) In addition to the CCD Pixel Missing Compensation function mentioned above, this product is provided with a function for
automatically correcting pixel missing points each time power is turned on and a function for automatically correcting pixel missing
points at the time of shooting at a dark object (interlinked with AGC level adjustment).
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out CCD Pixel Missing Compensation. (Perform this step about 30 to 40 minutes after
power-on. Be sure to conduct the CCD Pixel Missing Compensation after CCD image adjustment has been made.
(2) If the result of adjustment is NG (status 09), refer to the error code table shown below.
Furthermore, by observing an actual image, check for black/white dots. Then, judge whether the result of adjustment is OK or NG.
(In the case of NG, replace the CCD ass’y with a new one.)
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300E -- Missing pixel detected
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300F -- Missing pixel detection data writing
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09
63
MVX3i E
Total of black dots and white dots
STATUS (ST) ERROR CODE (bit)
Fig. 43
Error Code Table for CCD Pixel Missing Compensation

If a pixel missing is found on the CCD pixels, it is required to scan each of the RG and GB images. Therefore, black dot detection
is performed twice and white dot detection is performed twice, i.e., black/white dot detection is carried out four times in total. The
result of each detection is indicated on a bit basis.
Error No Error Conditions

00 Normal end (up to 5 black dots, up to 64 white dots)
01 T he number of black dots has exceeded the upper limit in the first time of detection (6 points or more detected).
02 T he number of black dots has exceeded the upper limit in the second time of detection (6 points or more detected).
04 T he total number of black dots in the first time and second time of detection has exceeded the upper limit
(6 points or more detected).
08 In black dots detection, a maladjustment of AE has been found.

10 T he number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the first time of detection (65 points or more detected).
20 T he number of white dots has exceeded the upper limit in the second time of detection (65 points or more detected).
40 T he total number of white dots in the first time and second time of detection has exceeded the upper limit
(65 points or more detected).
64
MVX3i E
2-6 Camera Section Adjustment

Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (2-6-1 to 2-6-5) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 2-6-6. If power must be
turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 2-6-6.
(2) The adjustments from 2-6-2 through 2-6-5 must be carried out in series.
If they are performed in dependently, the sufficient resut cannot be obtqined.
Preparation)
(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Tape/Card : Tape
AF : OFF
Chart : Standard angle of view
2-6-1 Iris Adjustment
CHART Light box (5600°K) not required

SPEC. Automatic adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris.
IRIS CS Function MD ADDR DT
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ Adjustment is in progress.
(press the PAUSE button.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Adjustment is completed.
Completion with ST :00, NG with ST :Others.
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ Adjustment data writing.
Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09
2-6-2 WB Adjustment (1)

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).
Note) In this adjustment, color balance gain data is set to FF. Be sure to carry out color balance adjustment de-
scribed in 2-6-3.
WB (1) CS Function MD ADDR DT
(press the PAUSE button.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- Adjustment is completed.
Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :Others.
65
MVX3i E
2-6-3 Color Balance Adjustment
CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart (white area at the left side)
M.EQ. Vectorscope
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
SPEC. R : × 2.0 (ratio to burst) 90°, Ye : × 1.0 (ratio to burst) 180°
Procedure)
(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.
CB (MANUAL) CS Function MD ADDR DT
R-Y GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust relevant data. 2 08 ST 3007 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ Adjustment is completed.
B-Y GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right. ↑ ↑ ST 3008 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
R-Y MAT 1) Make the setting shown at right. ↑ ↑ ST 3009 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
B-Y MAT 1) Make the setting shown at right. ↑ ↑ ST 300A "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
CHART Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filter

Procedure)

Procedure)
66
MVX3i E
2-6-6 EEPROM Writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (2-6-1 to 2-6-5) into the EEPROM.
EEPROM WRIT ING CS Function MD ADDR DT
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- Completion of EEPROM writing.
2-6-7 Color Balance Check
Preparation)
(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
(2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE : AUTO
AF : OFF
Demo mode : OFF
CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart

M.EQ. Vectorscope
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
SPEC. R : × 2.15 103.0° (± 0.15, ±5°), Ye : × 1.00 171.5° (± 0.15, ±5°), G : 260° (±5°)
Procedure)
(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON.
(2) Perform light-box recording, and carry out WB SET using the relevant function of the product.
(3) Take an image of the color bar chart, and check that the levels of R, Ye and G are within the specified ranges respectively.
(4) If the result of the above check is NG, carry out camera section adjustment again.
67
MVX3i E
2-7 Recorder Section Adjustment
Preparation)
(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.
Tape/Card : Tape
Camera/VCR : VCR
2-7-1 Y LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. 980 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Y level adjustment.
Repeat steps 2) to 4) so that the level range shown at the right
will be attained.
980 ± 20mV
Fig. 44

Y LEVEL CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 10 ST 000D ADJ White raster is output.
2) Change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ "ADJ"
3) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Adjustment data reflected
4) Make the setting shown at right. ↑ ↑ ST ↑ ↑ Check level.
68
MVX3i E
2-7-2 C LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. 700 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out C level adjustment.
Repeat steps 2) to 4) so that the level range shown at the right
will be attained.
700 ± 20mV
Fig.45

C LEVEL CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 10 ST 000E ADJ Green raster is output.
2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ "ADJ"
3) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Adjustment data reflected
4) Make the setting shown at right. ↑ ↑ ST ↑ ↑ Check level.
2-7-3 AGC Initial Value Adjustment
SIGNAL COLOR BAR

MODE E-E (ANALOG LINE IN)
Procedure)
(1) Input a color bar signal to the analog line circuit from the pattern generator.
(2) Carry out AGC initial value adjustment according to the table shown below.
AGC INIT IAL CS Function MD ADDR DT
2) Perform storing. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ Automatic adjustment is in progress.
(press the PAUSE button.) ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ Automatic adjustment is completed.
69
MVX3i E
2-7-4 SWP Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000)

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
SWP (AUT O) CS Function MD ADDR DT
2-7-5 C. FG Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000)

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
C.FG(AUT O) CS Function MD ADDR DT
2-7-6 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG
MODE Stop without VTR cassette
Procedure)
(1) Carry out reel FG adjustment according to the following table.
REEL FG (AUT O) CS Function MD ADDR DT
70
MVX3i E
2-7-7 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment
MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON)
SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.85 ± 0.02 [V]
Note)
(1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.
(2) In step 1 - 2), after completion of storing, "ST" remains indicated or "WR" is indicated momentarily and then "ST" is indicated
again without returning to "RD". Be sure to check in step 2 that the adjustment has been completed.
Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.85 ± 0.02[V].
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
BAT T ERY VOLT AGE DROP. CS Function MD ADDR DT
(press the PAUSE button.) Adjustment is completed.
2 Check if the value of DT is updated on DT 2 during ST ORE.
2-7-8 LCD P.C.B. Setting for Destination
When mounting the LCD P.C.B. of service part, perform the following adjustment.

LCD SET T ING CS Function MD ADDR DT
2) After adding the 1A to the current ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ T he LCD P.C.B. setting for destination
data, press the ST ORE key. (market place) is completed.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 10 ST 000E 0C
2) Chage the data to 0E and press the ↑ ↑ RD ↑ 0E
ST ORE key.
71
MVX3i E
2-8 Tape Path Adjustment

Note)
(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC III Section.
Preparation)
(1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (“INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS” P.2,3,4).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below (STEPS 1, 2, 3), play back the tracking master (DY9-1379-000) for tape path adjustment.
At STEP 2, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF so that the RF envelope will be 70%.
(2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift setting to normal according to the following table (STEPS 4 : P.OFF).

T RACKING T APE CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Play back the tracking tape.
2 1) Set up tracking shift.
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 00 ST 9FE7 F2
3) Perform 70% tracking shift by ↑ ↑ ST ↑ F0~FF T he amount of tracking shift is changed.
adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF.
* DT 00 in tracking shift released
3 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.
4 1) Select the normal mode.
2) T urn off power to the main unit.
72
MVX3i E
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach

the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.
Color balance adjustment chart

PAL MVX3i E
R-Y
BURST
B-Y
Ye
Color balance check chart

PAL MVX3i E
R-Y
R
BURST
Ye
B-Y
73
MVX3i E
IS adjustment chart
After printing, confirm that diameter of the circle is 36mm.
74
PARTS LIST
CONTENTS
EXPLODED VIEWS
Casing Parts Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Left Cover Unit Section-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Left Cover Unit Section-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Right Cover Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
MF Unit Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Flash Unit, Top Cover Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Rear Cover Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Recorder Unit Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
LCD Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
CVF Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
Camera Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22
Lens Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
Accessory Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
Accessory Section-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
FUSE Replacement Instruction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 38

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
PARTS LIST --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
CAUTION
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.
Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list.
2. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace FU3201, FU3202, FU3203, FU3204, FU3206,
FU3207, FU1801 only with same type : 0494001 1.0A-32V FUSE, and replace FU3205 only same
type : 049401.5 1.5A-32V FUSE manufacturer : littelfuse
1
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Casing Parts Section
Flash Unit
CVF Unit
Top Cover Section 4

5
3×2
4 Camera/Lens
Recorder 5
3
Unit Rear Cover
5 Unit
3
6
Left Cover 3×3

Unit 7×2
2
8×2
1
Right Cover
Unit
4
MF Unit
3
3 3
2
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 D52-0240-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS NEW
2 D52-0250-000 000 B 1 HOOD, LENS NEW
3 XA1-7170-307 000 F 10 SCREW
4 XA1-7170-607 000 F 3 SCREW
5 XA4-9170-457 000 F 3 SCREW
6 DH2-5142-000 000 C 1 FPC, R-MAIN NEW
7 DA3-1022-000 000 C 2 SCREW NEW
8 XA9-1507-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
3
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Left Cover Unit Section-1
8
3
9
1
2
10
5 11
6 6×2
4×2
19
24
7 4
20
4×2
12
15
14
13
21
17
16 18
22
23
4
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA3-0877-000 000 C 1 STRAP, HAND NEW
2 DA3-0857-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, HAND STRAP NEW
3 DA3-0853-000 000 B 1 COVER, S JACK NEW
4 XA1-7170-307 000 F 5 SCREW
5 DA3-0859-000 000 C 1 PLATE, S JACK COVER NEW
6 XA4-9170-457 000 F 3 SCREW
7 DA3-0827-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE NEW
8 DG1-7296-000 000 C 1 SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y
9 DH2-5126-000 000 C 1 FPC, JUNCTION NEW
10 XA4-9170-559 000 F 1 SCREW
11 DY1-8571-000 000 B 1 SWITCH ASS’Y, POWER NEW
12 DY1-8589-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, L-JACK NEW
13 DA3-0825-000 000 C 1 CAP, W LED NEW
14 YN1-3141-000 000 C 1 LENS, LED NEW
15 DA3-0824-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, W LED NEW
16 DG3-0178-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LJ2-MAIN NEW
17 XA1-7170-607 000 F 1 SCREW
18 DA3-0851-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW
19 DA3-1394-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CASSETTE NEW
20 DA3-0839-000 000 B 1 COVER, HEAD PHONE JACK NEW
21 DA2-0845-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, BOTTOM
22 WE8-6120-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE NEW
23 DA3-1200-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
24 DA3-0928-000 000 C 1 LABEL, NAME NEW
5
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Left Cover Unit Section-2
1×2
1×2
6
8 20
5
1
1×2
3
19
2
4
1 5
5
12
13 5
14
15
1×2
16
17
9 10 11
1x2 18
5
5
6
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 12 SCREW
2 DY1-8580-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
3 DA3-0818-000 000 B 1 COVER, L JACK2 NEW
4 DA3-0819-000 000 B 1 WINDOW, TALLY NEW
5 XA4-9170-457 000 F 6 SCREW
6 DA3-0855-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, L JACK COVER NEW
7 DG3-0173-000 000 C 1 PCB, LJ-1 NEW
8 DA3-0852-000 000 C 1 SPRING, L JACK COVER NEW
9 DG3-0174-000 000 C 1 PCB, LJ-2 NEW
10 DA3-0823-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, GY NEW
11 DG3-0175-000 000 C 1 PCB, GY NEW
12 DG3-0183-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LEFT NEW
13 DA3-0915-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SPEAKER NEW
14 WR1-5090-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER NEW
15 DH2-5143-000 000 C 1 WIRE, SPEAKER NEW
16 DA3-0836-000 000 C 1 SPRING, C HOOK NEW
17 DA3-0835-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN NEW
18 DF1-5034-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, CASSETTE NEW
19 DG3-0179-000 000 C 1 PCB, S JACK NEW
20 DA3-0838-000 000 C 1 LID, CASSETTE NEW
7
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Right Cover Unit Section
2
1×2
3 6
7
1×4 1
3×2
1 17
5 14×2
1×2
4
2 12
18
13
1×4
16 11
9
10 2
15 8
LCD Unit
8
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-457 000 F 15 SCREW
2 XA4-9170-559 000 F 3 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-307 000 F 3 SCREW
4 DA3-0865-000 000 C 1 BUTTON, C KEY NEW
5 DG3-0186-000 000 C 1 FPC, C KEY UNIT NEW
6 DG3-0176-000 000 C 1 PCB, R KEY UNIT NEW
7 DA3-0866-000 000 C 1 BUTTON, R KEY NEW
8 DA3-0864-000 000 B 1 COVER, SD NEW
9 DA3-0373-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CARD LID
10 DA3-0374-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD LID
11 DA3-0874-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD NEW
12 DA3-0863-000 000 B 1 COVER, LI BATT NEW
13 DA3-0875-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE INNER NEW
14 DA3-0381-000 000 C 2 RUBBER, INSULATION
15 DA2-0845-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, BOTTOM
16 DY1-8575-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LOWER RIGHT NEW
17 DY1-8573-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW
18 DA3-1208-000 000 C 1 TAPE, C KEY NEW
9
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MF Unit Section
7×3 7
4
1
9
3
10
7×2
10
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8577-000 000 B 1 MF RING ASS’Y NEW
2 DA3-0888-000 000 C 1 RING, MF PULSE NEW
3 DA3-0891-000 000 C 1 PRESS, MF PR NEW
4 DY1-8591-000 000 B 1 MF BASE ASS’Y NEW
5 DA3-0896-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MIC NEW
6 DA3-0895-000 000 C 1 FORM, MIC NEW
7 XA4-9170-457 000 F 6 SCREW
8 DA3-0892-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MF GND NEW
9 DG3-0184-000 000 C 1 FPC, MF UNIT NEW
10 DA3-1206-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MF GND2 NEW
11
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Flash Unit, Top Cover Section
9 10
8×4 11
12
3
13×2
4 6
12
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW
2 DY1-8584-000 000 C 1 FLASH ASS’Y NEW
3 DA3-0788-000 000 B 1 COVER, FLASH NEW
4 DY1-8585-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, FLASH NEW
5 DH9-0873-000 000 C 1 CAPACITOR, MAIN 330V 80uF NEW
6 DH2-5146-000 000 C 1 FPC, FLASH NEW
7 DA2-0436-000 000 C 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY
8 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW
9 DF1-5039-000 000 B 1 SHOE COVER ASS’Y NEW
10 DG3-0197-000 000 B 1 KEY ASS’Y, ZOOM PHOTO NEW
11 XA4-9170-457 000 F 1 SCREW
12 DY1-8590-000 000 B 1 COVER, TOP NEW
13 DA3-1021-000 000 C 2 SCREW NEW
13
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Rear Cover Unit Section
7
5 6
2×2
4×2
3×2
3×2
14
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DH2-5151-000 000 C 1 CABLE, 6P NEW
2 DF1-5008-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL ASS’Y, BATTERY
3 XA4-9170-357 000 F 4 SCREW
4 DA3-0380-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL, BATTERY D
5 DA3-0906-000 000 B 1 CASE, BATTERY NEW
6 DA3-0899-000 000 C 1 SPRING, BATTERY EJECT NEW
7 DA3-0907-000 000 C 1 KNOB, BATTERY EJECT NEW
15
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Recorder Unit Section
2 3
10×3
4 9
5 11×3
1 13 15
6
Camera/Lens Unit 5×3
17
14
12
16×2
7 8
16
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA1-9903-000 000 C 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
2 DY1-8609-000 000 B 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC III NEW
3 DA3-0920-000 000 C 1 SHEET, GUARD NEW
4 DA3-0780-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MAIN NEW
5 XA1-7170-307 000 F 4 SCREW
6 DG3-0181-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, DC NEW
7 DA3-0812-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW
8 DH2-5133-000 000 C 1 WIRE DC, 3P NEW
9 DA3-0938-000 000 C 1 PLATE EARTH NEW
11 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW
12 DA3-0784-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD PM1 NEW
13 DA3-0161-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA
15 DY1-8588-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW
16 XA9-0610-000 000 F 2 SCREW
17 DA3-0929-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
17
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
LCD Unit Section
4
5
26
6 27
7 3 24
1 23
14 25
29×2 22
20 2
15
14
21
12
19
11
13
17
18
28 16
5×2
10×3
8 9
18
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA3-0802-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE TOP NEW
2 DG3-0189-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, LCD NEW
3 DA3-0803-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE BOTTOM NEW
4 DG3-0188-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD NEW
5 XA4-9170-457 000 F 3 SCREW
6 DH2-5135-000 000 C 1 CABLE, LCD 12P NEW
8 DA3-0811-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD NAME NEW
9 DA3-0810-000 000 C 1 BADGE,LCD NEW
10 XA1-7170-307 000 F 3 SCREW
11 DA3-0934-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW
12 DA3-0805-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD NEW
13 DA3-0922-000 000 C 1 GUM, LCD NEW
14 XA1-7170-207 000 F 2 SCREW
15 DG3-0182-000 000 C 1 PCB, LCD NEW
16 DA3-0806-000 000 B 1 FRAME, LCD NEW
17 DA3-0809-000 000 C 1 SPRING, LCD LOCK NEW
18 DA3-0883-000 000 C 1 KNOB, LCD LOCK NEW
19 DA3-0942-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD NEW
20 DA3-0943-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BOTTOM COVER NEW
21 DA3-0804-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, LCD NEW
22 DG3-0290-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y, LCD NEW
23 DA3-0807-000 000 C 1 BRACKET, LCD NEW
*1 24 DH9-0879-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW
*2 DY1-8582-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW
25 DA3-0921-000 000 C 1 GND, LCD NEW
26 DA3-0801-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW
27 DA2-1737-000 000 C 1 MAGNET
28 XA9-0610-000 000 F 1 SCREW
29 DA3-1210-000 000 C 2 CUSHION, LCD NEW
*1 : Same quality as the production line.

*2 : Free from the pixel dot.
19
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
CVF Unit Section
1 2
3 13
9 12
11
8
10
7
6
5 17
4
15 18
19
14×2 20
21×2 14×2
16
20
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA3-0911-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW
2 DA3-0908-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
3 DH2-5136-000 000 B 1 FPC, CVF-MAIN NEW
4 DG3-0192-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW
5 DA3-0457-000 000 C 1 REFLECTER, CVF
6 DA3-0460-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF
7 DA3-0461-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF LCD
8 WG2-5241-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVF
9 DA3-0216-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
10 DA3-0910-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF INNER NEW
11 DA3-0211-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LENS CVF
12 YN1-3111-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE
13 DA3-0909-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, EYE PIECE NEW
14 XA4-9170-457 000 F 4 SCREW
15 DA3-0912-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC NEW
16 DG3-0196-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, CVF NEW
17 DA3-0455-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF DIOP
18 DA2-1840-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, CVF KNOB
19 DA3-0925-000 000 C 1 FRAME, CVF LENS NEW
20 DA3-0924-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
21 XA4-9170-557 000 F 2 SCREW
21
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Camera Unit Section
8
14×2
4×2 13
7
11
8
15
5 10 8
9
12
6
4 16
Lens Ass'y
17
2×3
3×3
22
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA3-0898-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW
3 XA9-1440-000 000 C 3 SCREW
4 XA1-7170-207 000 F 3 SCREW
5 XA4-9170-457 000 F 1 SCREW
6 DA3-1017-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CAM GND3 NEW
8 XA1-7170-307 000 F 3 SCREW
9 DH9-0881-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR NEW
11 DY1-8586-000 000 B 1 CCD ASS’Y NEW
12 DA3-0814-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD CCD2 NEW
13 DG3-0172-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD NEW
14 XA4-9170-559 000 F 2 SCREW
16 DG3-0177-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CCD NEW
23
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Lens Unit Section
(6) (6)
(4)×3
1 (7)×4
(5)
(2)
(3)
(7)
(6)
24
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DG3-0316-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y NEW
2 YH8-2009-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y NEW
3 DY1-8370-000 000 C 1 IS ASS’Y
4 XA4-9170-607 000 F 3 SCREW
5 YH1-2057-000 000 C 1 FPC, LENS NEW
6 XA4-9170-357 000 F 3 SCREW
7 XA4-9170-507 000 F 5 SCREW
25
DMC III
PARTS LIST
Mechanical Chassis Section-1
1 3
(10)
3×3 4
6 7
26
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE
2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW
3 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW
4 DY1-8610-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y NEW
5 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER
6 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASS’Y
7 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)
8 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW
9 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE
10 DA2-2248-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING
27
DMC III
PARTS LIST
1
3 2
1
4
9
5
6 11 10
7
8
12
6
13
28
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER
2 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, S
3 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)
4 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION
5 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION
6 DA2-2139-000 000 C 2 WASHER
7 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, S
8 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)
9 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, T
10 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT
11 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T
12 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)
13 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
29
DMC III
PARTS LIST
1 (5)
2×2
(4) 3
8
(6)
2×3
9
2×2
(7)
11
12
13
2
10
30
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING
2 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW
3 DG1-4497-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y
4 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S
5 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T
6 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW
7 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
8 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW
9 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN
10 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW
11 DG1-4500-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH
12 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER
13 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)
31
DMC III
PARTS LIST
1
4
9
5
2
6
11
7
10
32
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-2191-000 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM
2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW
3 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING
4 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY
5 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT
6 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER
7 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL
8 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER
9 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN
10 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN
11 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM
33
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Accessory Section-1
CG-570 N.S. (Product available)
N.S. (Product available) CA-570
CB-570
N.S. (Product available)
2
CG-580
JPN
A
E
PLUG TYPE B
N.S. AS
(Commercially available.
Make copy sample pictures if necessary.) N.S. (Product available)
5
SDC-8M BP-511/512/522/535 WL-D81A
3 4
(6)
(7)
34
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE
2 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E)
D82-0644-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(B)
D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS)
3 D81-1450-000 000 C 1 CASE, MEMORY CARD
4 DY1-5242-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-511/512 (BROWN)
DY1-8303-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-522/535 (GRAY)
5 D83-0662-000 000 C 1 WL-D81A WIRELESS CONTROLLER NEW
6 DY1-8489-000 000 B 1 COVER, BATTERY
7 DY1-8491-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E)
35
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
Accessory Section-2
N.S. (Product available) N.S. (Product available)
DM-50 WD-H46
2
6
1 5

TL-H46
6
N.S. (Product available) N.S. (Product available)
VL-3 VFL-1
3
3 4 7

FS-H46U
N.S. (Product available) 9

8
IFC-300PCU SS-600 PC-A10
36
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8246-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, FRONT
2 DY1-8247-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, REAR
3 DY1-8245-000 000 E 1 LAMP, HAROGEN
4 DY1-8565-000 000 B 1 FRONT COVER ASS’Y
5 DA1-5797-000 000 B 1 CAP, CONVERTER (FRONT) NEW
6 DA1-5796-000 000 B 1 CAP, CONVERTER (REAR) NEW
8 D81-1330-000 000 C 1 SHOULDER STRAP SS-600 NEW
9 DY4-3338-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, SCART PC-A10
37
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
FUSE Replacement Instruction
CAUTION - FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE FU3201, FU3202,
FU3203, FU3204, FU3206, FU3207, FU1801 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE : 0494001 1.0A-
32V FUSE, AND REPLACE FU3205 ONLY SAME TYPE : 049401.5 1.5A-32V FUSE
MANUFACTURER : LITTELFUSE
MAIN P.C.B.
IC301
IC300 IC1501
IC100
IC1001
IC1004
IC2101 IC101
IC1003 IC1205
IC1002
IC1203
IC1301 IC102
IC3202 IC3204
IC1603 IC1006 IC1202

IC1601 IC1005
IC802 IC1201
IC801 IC1200
IC1602
IC104
FU3205 FU3206 FU3207
FU3201
FU1801
FU3203 FU3204 FU3202
38
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
ELECTRICAL PARTS
MAIN P.C.B. ASS’Y
CN300 VS1-7122-011 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 11p NEW
FU1801 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
FU3201 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
FU3202 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
FU3203 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
FU3204 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
FU3205 VD7-2241-501 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
FU3206 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
FU3207 VD7-2241-001 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
LI-1 P.C.B. ASS’Y

CN2972 WS1-6098-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DV
CN2973 WS1-6004-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB
LI-2 P.C.B. ASS’Y

CN2962 WS1-5716-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC
CN2963 WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/V
SJACK P.C.B. ASS’Y

CN53 WC2-5444-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-VIDEO
CN54 WS1-5717-000 000 C 1 JACK, HEAD PHONE
39
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
3 D52-0240-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS NEW
3 D52-0250-000 000 B 1 HOOD, LENS NEW
37 D81-1330-000 000 C 1 SHOULDER STRAP SS-600 NEW
35 D81-1450-000 000 C 1 CASE, MEMORY CARD
35 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E)
35 D82-0644-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(B)
35 D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS)
35 D83-0662-000 000 C 1 WL-D81A WIRELESS CONTROLLER NEW
37 DA1-5796-000 000 B 1 CAP, CONVERTER (REAR) NEW
17 DA1-9903-000 000 C 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS
13 DA2-0436-000 000 C 1 SHOE, ACCESSORY
29 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER
31 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW
5,9 DA2-0845-000 000 C 2 RUBBER, BOTTOM
19 DA2-1737-000 000 C 1 MAGNET
21 DA2-1840-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, CVF KNOB
27 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW
27 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)
27 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW
27,29,31,33 DA2-2139-000 000 C 5 WASHER
33 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER
33 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL
33 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT
33 DA2-2191-000 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM
33 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM
33 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN
33 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING
33 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY
29 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT
29 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T
27 DA2-2248-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING
31 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW
31 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW
17 DA3-0161-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD HA
21 DA3-0211-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LENS CVF
21 DA3-0216-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
9 DA3-0373-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CARD LID
9 DA3-0374-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD LID
15 DA3-0380-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL, BATTERY D
9 DA3-0381-000 000 C 2 RUBBER, INSULATION
21 DA3-0455-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF DIOP
21 DA3-0457-000 000 C 1 REFLECTER, CVF
21 DA3-0460-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF
21 DA3-0461-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF LCD
17 DA3-0780-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MAIN NEW
13 DA3-0788-000 000 B 1 COVER, FLASH NEW
19 DA3-0801-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW
19 DA3-0802-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE TOP NEW
19 DA3-0803-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE BOTTOM NEW
19 DA3-0804-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, LCD NEW
19 DA3-0805-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD NEW
19 DA3-0806-000 000 B 1 FRAME, LCD NEW
19 DA3-0807-000 000 C 1 BRACKET, LCD NEW
19 DA3-0809-000 000 C 1 SPRING, LCD LOCK NEW
19 DA3-0810-000 000 C 1 BADGE,LCD NEW
40
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
19 DA3-0811-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD NAME NEW
17,23 DA3-0812-000 000 C 4 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW
7 DA3-0818-000 000 B 1 COVER, L JACK2 NEW
7 DA3-0819-000 000 B 1 WINDOW, TALLY NEW
7 DA3-0823-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, GY NEW
5 DA3-0824-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, W LED NEW
5 DA3-0825-000 000 C 1 CAP, W LED NEW
5 DA3-0827-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE NEW
7 DA3-0835-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN NEW
7 DA3-0836-000 000 C 1 SPRING, C HOOK NEW
7 DA3-0838-000 000 C 1 LID, CASSETTE NEW
5 DA3-0839-000 000 B 1 COVER, HEAD PHONE JACK NEW
5 DA3-0851-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW
7 DA3-0852-000 000 C 1 SPRING, L JACK COVER NEW
5 DA3-0853-000 000 B 1 COVER, S JACK NEW
7 DA3-0855-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, L JACK COVER NEW
5 DA3-0857-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, HAND STRAP NEW
5 DA3-0859-000 000 C 1 PLATE, S JACK COVER NEW
9 DA3-0863-000 000 B 1 COVER, LI BATT NEW
9 DA3-0864-000 000 B 1 COVER, SD NEW
9 DA3-0865-000 000 C 1 BUTTON, C KEY NEW
9 DA3-0866-000 000 C 1 BUTTON, R KEY NEW
9 DA3-0874-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD NEW
9 DA3-0875-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE INNER NEW
5 DA3-0877-000 000 C 1 STRAP, HAND NEW
19 DA3-0883-000 000 C 1 KNOB, LCD LOCK NEW
11 DA3-0888-000 000 C 1 RING, MF PULSE NEW
11 DA3-0891-000 000 C 1 PRESS, MF PR NEW
11 DA3-0892-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MF GND NEW
11 DA3-0895-000 000 C 1 FORM, MIC NEW
11 DA3-0896-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MIC NEW
23 DA3-0898-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW
15 DA3-0899-000 000 C 1 SPRING, BATTERY EJECT NEW
15 DA3-0906-000 000 B 1 CASE, BATTERY NEW
15 DA3-0907-000 000 C 1 KNOB, BATTERY EJECT NEW
21 DA3-0908-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
21 DA3-0909-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, EYE PIECE NEW
21 DA3-0910-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF INNER NEW
21 DA3-0911-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW
21 DA3-0912-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC NEW
7 DA3-0915-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SPEAKER NEW
17 DA3-0920-000 000 C 1 SHEET, GUARD NEW
19 DA3-0921-000 000 C 1 GND, LCD NEW
19 DA3-0922-000 000 C 1 GUM, LCD NEW
21 DA3-0924-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
21 DA3-0925-000 000 C 1 FRAME, CVF LENS NEW
5 DA3-0928-000 000 C 1 LABEL, NAME NEW
17 DA3-0929-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
19 DA3-0934-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW
17 DA3-0938-000 000 C 1 PLATE EARTH NEW
19 DA3-0942-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD NEW
19 DA3-0943-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BOTTOM COVER NEW
13 DA3-1021-000 000 C 2 SCREW NEW
3 DA3-1022-000 000 C 2 SCREW NEW
5 DA3-1200-000 000 C 1 CUSHION NEW
41
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
11 DA3-1206-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MF GND2 NEW
9 DA3-1208-000 000 C 1 TAPE, C KEY NEW
19 DA3-1210-000 000 C 2 CUSHION, LCD NEW
5 DA3-1394-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CASSETTE NEW
31 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
31 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE S
31 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, GUIDE T
29 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, TENSION
29 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASS’Y, TENSION
29 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y
27 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASS’Y
29 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASS’Y, S
15 DF1-5008-000 000 C 2 TERMINAL ASS’Y, BATTERY
7 DF1-5034-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, CASSETTE NEW
13 DF1-5039-000 000 B 1 SHOE COVER ASS’Y NEW
31 DG1-4497-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASS’Y
31 DG1-4500-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASS’Y, PINCH
33 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, MAIN
31 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, LOADING
31 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASS’Y, CAPSTAN
29 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, S
29 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASS’Y, T
27 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASS’Y, CASSETTE
5 DG1-7296-000 000 C 1 SHOE CONNECTOR ASS’Y
23 DG3-0172-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD NEW
7 DG3-0173-000 000 C 1 PCB, LJ-1 NEW
7 DG3-0174-000 000 C 1 PCB, LJ-2 NEW
7 DG3-0175-000 000 C 1 PCB, GY NEW
9 DG3-0176-000 000 C 1 PCB, R KEY UNIT NEW
23 DG3-0177-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CCD NEW
5 DG3-0178-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LJ2-MAIN NEW
7 DG3-0179-000 000 C 1 PCB, S JACK NEW
17 DG3-0181-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, DC NEW
19 DG3-0182-000 000 C 1 PCB, LCD NEW
7 DG3-0183-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LEFT NEW
11 DG3-0184-000 000 C 1 FPC, MF UNIT NEW
9 DG3-0186-000 000 C 1 FPC, C KEY UNIT NEW
19 DG3-0188-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD NEW
19 DG3-0189-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, LCD NEW
21 DG3-0192-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF NEW
21 DG3-0196-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, CVF NEW
13 DG3-0197-000 000 B 1 KEY ASS’Y, ZOOM PHOTO NEW
19 DG3-0290-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASS’Y, LCD NEW
25 DG3-0316-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y NEW
5 DH2-5126-000 000 C 1 FPC, JUNCTION NEW
17 DH2-5133-000 000 C 1 WIRE DC, 3P NEW
21 DH2-5136-000 000 B 1 FPC, CVF-MAIN NEW
3 DH2-5142-000 000 C 1 FPC, R-MAIN NEW
7 DH2-5143-000 000 C 1 WIRE, SPEAKER NEW
13 DH2-5146-000 000 C 1 FPC, FLASH NEW
15 DH2-5151-000 000 C 1 CABLE, 6P NEW
13 DH9-0873-000 000 C 1 CAPACITOR, MAIN 330V 80uF NEW
*1 19 DH9-0879-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW
23 DH9-0881-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR NEW
31 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)
29 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)
29 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)
29 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)
42
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
35 DY1-5242-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-511/512 (BROWN)
37 DY1-8245-000 000 E 1 LAMP, HAROGEN
37 DY1-8246-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, FRONT
37 DY1-8247-000 000 C 1 WIND SCREEN, REAR
35 DY1-8303-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-522/535 (GRAY)
25 DY1-8370-000 000 C 1 IS ASS’Y
35 DY1-8489-000 000 B 1 COVER, BATTERY
35 DY1-8491-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E)
27 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASS’Y, SLIDE
35 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE
37 DY1-8565-000 000 B 1 FRONT COVER ASS’Y
5 DY1-8571-000 000 B 1 SWITCH ASS’Y, POWER NEW
9 DY1-8573-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW
9 DY1-8575-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, LOWER RIGHT NEW
11 DY1-8577-000 000 B 1 MF RING ASS’Y NEW
7 DY1-8580-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
*2 19 DY1-8582-000 000 B 1 LCD ASS’Y NEW
13 DY1-8584-000 000 C 1 FLASH ASS’Y NEW
13 DY1-8585-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, FLASH NEW
23 DY1-8586-000 000 B 1 CCD ASS’Y NEW
17 DY1-8588-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW
5 DY1-8589-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, L-JACK NEW
13 DY1-8590-000 000 B 1 COVER, TOP NEW
11 DY1-8591-000 000 B 1 MF BASE ASS’Y NEW
17 DY1-8609-000 000 B 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMC III NEW
27 DY1-8610-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y NEW
37 DY4-3338-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, SCART PC-A10
VD7-2241-001 000 C 7 CHIP FUSE
VD7-2241-501 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE
VS1-7098-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 21p NEW
WC2-5444-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-VIDEO
21 WG2-5241-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVF
7 WR1-5090-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER NEW
WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/V
WS1-5716-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC
WS1-5717-000 000 C 1 JACK, HEAD PHONE
WS1-6004-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB
WS1-6098-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DV
13 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW
27,31,33 XA1-7140-147 000 C 3 SCREW
19,23 XA1-7170-207 000 F 5 SCREW
3,5,7,9,17,19,23
XA1-7170-307 000 F 40 SCREW
3,5 XA1-7170-607 000 F 4 SCREW
15,25 XA4-9170-357 000 F 7 SCREW
13 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW
3,5,7,9,11,13,19,21,23
XA4-9170-457 000 F 42 SCREW
25 XA4-9170-507 000 F 5 SCREW
21 XA4-9170-557 000 F 2 SCREW
5,9,23 XA4-9170-559 000 F 6 SCREW
25 XA4-9170-607 000 F 3 SCREW
17,19 XA9-0610-000 000 F 3 SCREW
17 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW
23 XA9-1440-000 000 C 3 SCREW
43
MVX3i E
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
3 XA9-1507-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
25 YH1-2057-000 000 C 1 FPC, LENS NEW
25 YH8-2009-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y NEW
21 YN1-3111-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE
5 YN1-3141-000 000 C 1 LENS, LED NEW
44
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAMERA SECTION-2
CAMERA SECTION-3
LENS DRIVE SECTION
MPEG4/USB SECTION
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
SERVO SECTION
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
POWER SUPPLY SECTION
EVF SECTION
R-KEY, LCD SECTION
LJ-2, DC, SJACK SECTION
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM MVX3i E
SHOE CONNECTOR ASS'Y
LENS TEMP SENS
LCD UNIT
UNIT ZOOM SENS
ZOOM MOTOR 6P 1 DV JACK USB JACK

IC501 6 POWER SWITCH A'SSY
CN1611 CN2973
CN2972
GY P.C.B.
1 CN2971 11
FLASH P.C.B. LJ-1 P.C.B.
FOCUS MOTOR LOWER RIGHT COVER ASS'Y IC1611
FOCUS SENS 11P LCD

15 1 6P
IG METER IS UNIT
IC502
CN501
ZOOM KEY 6 1
15P
UNIT CN11
8P
20P
10P
IC1000 40P RED BLK
20 CN51 1
IC1001 IC1006
CCD P.C.B. B20 B1 SJACK P.C.B.

IC1004 IC1003 IC1002 A20
CN1101
A1 SPEAKER
1 2
IC1005 CN53 CN52 23P

24P
2 CN1000 38 1 CN61 23
1 39 CCD FPC UNIT S JACK 2P
2 22
CVF P.C.B.
8P 1 CN62 22
39P 1
8P CN50
22P
15P
L FPC UNIT 8
FLASH FPC UNIT

HP JACK CN54
13P
BACK LIGHT
LCD
DMC III ( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS III )
MAIN SLIDE DRUM VIDEO LOADING LCD FPC UNIT
CHASSIS CHASSIS MOTOR HEAD MOTOR 5P
12 13
CN2953 21P 18P 11P 7P 10P
CN302 CN301
2 1 1 18 1 10
61P 23P
MF FPC UNIT
8P
20 CN303 1
61 CN2952 1
11
CN300
1
CN2001
7 1
23 1 9 10 R-KEY P.C.B.
21 2 60 2 22 2 CN102
13P IC2000 CN1501 1 5P
2 1 1 2 CN71
IC2303 5
IC3500
CN101 1
12
CN1602 IC301 IC2302 IC1501 26 27 10P 12P
IC300 CN74
A1 B1 IC1001 IC3501
1 8P 1 2
IC100 12 1 CN902 9
40P
IC1004 1 2
CN1200 IC2301
50 51 CN100 51P CN70 1
33 1 IC1000
32 2 A20 B20 IC103 9P 9P IC902
7 8 CN73 IC4201
IC2101
CN1000 IC101
33P
IC1002 IC404 CN103 51P 9
IC400
IC1003 51 50 12P
IC1203 IC1205 4
12P IC1301 4P IC901
IC102 CN72 12 CN901 1
IC1103 2 1
8P CN4000 1
IC3201
IC1102 IC1202 3
IC3202 IC3204 3P
IC1601 IC1603 IC1006 CN3201
CN1601 CN903
1 7 IC1005 1 1 24
CN701 IC801
IC802
2 8
IC1201 IC105
IC1200 IC1801
LCD P.C.B.
4P
4
IC803
A1 B1 MAIN P.C.B.
2 CN2951 22 IC1602 CN2900
1 IC1101 A12 B12 24P
1 23 6 1
IC104 CN3202
23P 6P
SD CARD
1
MF BASE ASS'Y 6P
6 3P
3 1
6P
Metal contact (Pins' face down) Metal contact (Pins' face up)
CN2961
DC JACK 19 1 : :
IC1691
CN1
W-LED FPC UNIT
CN2962 CN2963 6P
LJ-2 P.C.B.
Metal contact Metal contact
4P
DC P.C.B.
MIC JACK AV JACK
BATTERY TERMINAL ASS'Y 23P C-KEY FPC UNIT
01 Aug. 2003 C CANON INC. 2003

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM MVX3i E
MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. FLASH P.C.B. CCD P.C.B. R-KEY P.C.B. LCD P.C.B. CCD FPC
CN100 CN303 CN2001 CN501 CN1000 CN70 CN901 CN1101
1 PHOTO SW 1 BOT E 1 HA GND 1 ST GND 1 N.C 1 KEY AD1 1 VTR UNREG A1 VSUBC
2 HALF PHOTO SW 2 BOT C 2 H1A 2 ST GND 2 N.C 2 KEY AD2 2 MO GND A2 GND
3 CK 3V 3 MIC GND 3 H1B 3 ST GND 3 N.C 3 LI 3V 3 LCD BL ON A3 OS2
4 ZOOM AD 4 MIC3 4 HA GND 4 ST GND 4 PBLK DIS 4 CARD PRO 4 PANEL XOE/DALD UD A4 GND
5 GND 5 REC PRF 5 H2A 5 ST GND 5 +4.7V 5 VTR UNREG 5 PANEL LCK LR A5 GND
6 TAPE/CARD SW 6 MIC2 6 H2B 6 ST VDHGL VL 6 GND 6 VTR UNREG 6 LCD EEP SIN A6 GND
7 EJECT SW 7 MIC1 7 HA GND 7 ST EFCHG 7 GND 7 MO GND 7 LCD EEP CS A7 XV4
8 GND 8 T IN− CN2900 8 ST STSP 8 H1 8 MO GND 8 LCD CS A8 −7V
CN101 9 T OUT− A1 V I/O 9 P5V 9 GND 9 LCD ON 9 EEP/PANEL/EVF SO A9 XSG2
1 DEBCLK 10 T IN+ A2 GND 10 ST POP CONT 10 XSG3 10 LCD BL ON 10 EEP/PANEL/EVF CLK A10 GND
2 DEBUD 11 T OUT+ A3 VTR POW SW 11 ST POP SW 11 GND 11 LCD EEP SIN 11 PANEL A B A11 OFD
3 DEBDD 12 C IN A4 T/C POW SW 12 ST UNREG 12 H2 12 LCD EEP CS 12 LCD ON A12 GND
4 XDEBEN 13 CIN GND A5 CAM POW SW 13 ST UNREG 13 GND 13 LCD CS CN902 A13 +2.7V
5 GND 14 LED A A6 FCH 0 14 ST UNREG 14 GND 14 PANEL EVF IS SO 1 LCD 5 A14 GND
6 GND 15 LED K A7 TCK 15 ST UNREG 15 GND 15 PANEL EVF IS CLK 2 LCD 3.0 A15 GND
7 DBGE 16 S IN− A8 SWP 16 OS1 16 GND 3 LCD 12V A16 15V
8 DRESET 17 S OUT− A9 GND 17 GND 17 GND 4 CSYNC A17 GND
9 RESET 18 S IN+ A10 PBRF 18 GND 18 LCD 12 5 GND A18 OS1
10 E3+LI 19 S OUT+ A11 EVF R GY P.C.B. 19 15V 19 LCD 2.7V 6 GND A19 GND
11 SDI DINT 20 EOT E A12 EVF G CN1611 20 +2.7V 20 LCD 2.7V 7 PANEL B A20 GND
12 DCLK 21 EOT C B1 EVF HD 1 GND 21 OFD 21 LCD 2.7V 8 PANEL G B1 XSG4
13 PCST0 CN701 B2 MODE RESET 2 GND 22 GND 22 CSYNC 9 PANEL R B2 XV3
14 PCST1 1 MIC GND R B3 VTR ON IC3201 3 Y GY OUT 23 XSG2 23 GND CN903 B3 XV2
15 PCST2 2 INT MIC R B4 N.C 4 CAM 2.7V 24 −7V 24 GND 1 TESTR B4 GND
16 PCST3 3 MIC GND L B5 MIC2 5 TALLY LED 25 XV4 25 PANEL B 2 RGT B5 XV1
17 SDAO TPC 4 INT MIC L B6 MIC3 6 P5V 26 GND 26 PANEL G 3 BLUE B6 GND
18 GND CN1000 B7 TRST 27 GND 27 PANEL R 4 RED B7 RG
19 VTR ON A1 VSUBC B8 TMS 28 OS2 28 PANEL BT SW 5 GREEN B8 GND
20 SYSRDY A2 GND B9 TDI 29 GND 29 PANEL PEN SW 6 PSIG B9 XSG1
21 PI2 BOOT A3 OS2 B10 TDO LJ-1 P.C.B. 30 VSUBC 30 EXP DIAL 7 HCK1 B10 GND
22 XRESET A4 GND B11 COM CN2971 31 XSG4 31 KEY AD4 8 HCK2 B11 PBLK
23 VTOM SCK A5 GND B12 EVF B 1 GND 32 XV3 32 CARD MO/ST SW 9 Cex1/Flex1 B12 +4.7V
24 VTOM DATA A6 GND CN2951 2 XTPA 33 XV2 33 CARD FUTA DET 10 TEST B13 GND
25 MTOV DATA A7 XV4 1 GND 3 TPA 34 XV1 34 CARD DET 11 REF B14 H1
26 TBUSY A8 −7V 2 P GY OUT 4 TPB 35 GND 35 MMC VDD 12 HST B15 GND
27 TBUSY A9 XSG2 3 CAM2.7V 5 XTPB 36 RG 36 GND 13 WIDE B16 GND
CN102 A10 GND 4 GND 6 GND 37 GND 37 GND 14 SLVSG B17 XSG3
1 GND A11 OFD 5 GND 7 D+ 38 GND 38 MMC DAT1 15 VSSG B18 GND
2 P.AE/GREEN SW A12 GND 6 V I/O 8 D− 39 XSG1 39 GND 16 VDDG B19 H2
3 KEY AD0 A13 +2.7V 7 GND 9 GND 40 MMC DAT 17 VSS B20 GND
4 DIAL CW A14 GND 8 AV DET 10 V BUS (+5V) 41 GND 18 VDD
5 DIAL CCW A15 GND 9 AV L 11 GND 42 GND 19 DWN
6 KEY AD3 A16 15V 10 GND SJACK P.C.B. 43 GND 20 EN
7 MEM ACC LED A17 GND 11 AV R CN50 44 MMC SCK 21 VCK L FPC
8 P5V A18 OS1 12 GND 1 CAM PW LED 45 GND 22 VST CN11
9 DIAL AD0 A19 GND 13 EXT MIC GND LJ-2 P.C.B. 2 VTR PW LED 46 GND 23 COM 1 TAPE/CARD SW
10 DIAL AD1 A20 GND 14 EXT L CN2961 3 DVDD 2.7V 47 MMC DAT2 24 TESTL 2 GND
CN103 B1 XSG4 15 EXT P DET 1 GND 4 S/S SW 48 MMC CMD 3 ZOOM AD
1 GND B2 XV3 16 EXT R 2 P GY OUT 5 CAM PW SW 49 MMC RSV 4 CK 3V
2 MMC RSV B3 XV2 17 EXT MIC GND 3 CAM2.7V 6 VTR PW SW 50 GND 5 HALF PHOTO SW
3 MMC CMD B4 GND 18 EXT MIC GND 4 GND 7 NET PW SW 51 N.C 6 PHOTO SW
4 MMC DAT2 B5 XV1 19 CH UNREG 5 V I/O 8 GND CN71
5 GND B6 GND 20 CHAGE LED 6 GND CN51 1 PANEL BT SW
6 GND B7 RG 21 P5V 7 AV DET 1 SP − 2 GND
7 MMC SCK B8 GND 22 WHITE LED 8 AV L 2 SP + 3 LCD 2.7V
8 GND B9 XSG1 23 N.C 9 GND 3 HP DET 4 N.C
9 GND B10 GND CN2952 10 AV R 4 HP R 5 N.C
10 GND B11 PBLK 1 GND 11 GND 5 HP COM CN72
11 MMC DAT B12 +5V 2 VBUS 12 EXT MIC GND 6 HP L 1 EXP DIAL
12 GND B13 GND 3 GND 13 EXT L 7 HP COM 2 KEY AD4
13 MMC DAT1 B14 H1 4 GND 14 EXT P DET 8 GND 3 GND
14 GND B15 GND 5 D− 15 EXT R 9 Y I/O 4 PNL OPEN SW
15 GND B16 GND 6 D+ 16 EXT MIC GND 10 GND CN73
16 MMC VDD B17 XSG3 7 GND 17 EXT MIC GND 11 C I/O 1 N.C
17 CARD DET B18 GND 8 GND 18 CH UNREG 12 S DET 2 LCD 2.7V
18 CARD FUTA DET B19 H2 9 XTPB 19 CHAGE LED 13 GND 3 LCD 12V
19 CARD MO/ST SW B20 GND 10 TPB 14 NET PW SW 4 CSYNC
20 KEY AD4 CN1200 11 TPA 15 VTR PW SW 5 GND
21 EXP DIAL 1 FOCUS A+ 12 XTPA 16 CAM PW SW 6 GND
22 PANEL PEN SW 2 FOCUS A+ 13 GND 17 S/S SW 7 PANEL B
23 PANEL BT SW 3 FOCUS A− 14 GND 18 DVDD 2.7V 8 PANEL G
24 PANEL R 4 FOCUS B− 15 CAM PW LED 19 VTR PW LED 9 PANEL R
25 PANEL G 5 FOCUS B+ 16 VTR PW LED 20 CAM PW LED CN74
26 PANEL B 6 ZOOM A+ 17 DVDD2.7V CN52 1 VTR UNREG
27 GND 7 ZOOM A− 18 S/S SW 1 SP − 2 MO GND
28 GND 8 ZOOM B− 19 CAM PW SW 2 SP + 3 LCD BL ON
29 CSYNC 9 ZOOM B+ 20 VTR PW SW 4 N.C
30 LCD 2.7V 10 IG DRIVE− 21 NET PW SW 5 N.C
31 LCD 2.7V 11 IG DRIVE+ 22 GND 6 LCD EEP SIN
32 LCD 2.7V 12 IG HALL IN− 23 S DET CVF P.C.B. 7 LCD EEP CS
33 LCD 12 13 IG HALL OUT + 24 C I/O CN61 8 LCD CS
34 GND 14 IG HALL OUT− 25 GND 1 XSTH 9 PANEL EVF/IS SO
35 GND 15 IG HALL IN+ 26 GND 2 STH 10 PANEL EVF/IS CLK
36 PANEL EVF IS CLK 16 FOCUS SENS 27 Y I/O 3 CKH1 11 N.C
37 PANEL EVF IS SO 17 FOCUS VCC 28 GND 4 VSS 12 LCD ON
38 LCD CS 18 FOCUS LED 29 GND 5 CKH2 CN4000
39 LCD EEP CS 19 TEMP VCC 30 HP COM 6 VDD 1 MMC RSV
40 LCD EEP SIN 20 TEMP 31 HP L 7 G 2 MMC CMD
41 LCD BL ON 21 ZOOM SENS 32 HP COM 8 R 3 MMC VSS1
42 LCD ON 22 ZOOM VCC 33 HP R 9 B 4 MMC VDD
43 MO GND 23 ZOOM LED 34 HP DET 10 VSS 5 MMC CLK
44 MO GND 24 ND DRIVE− 35 SP+ 11 DSG 6 MMC VSS1
45 VTR UNREG 25 ND HALL IN− 36 SP+ 12 XDSG 7 MMC DAT
46 VTR UNREG 26 ND HALL OUT− 37 SP− 13 DSD 8 MMC DAT1
47 CARD PRO 27 ND HALL IN+ 38 SP− 14 VBB 9 MMC DAT2
48 LI 3V 28 ND HALL OUT+ 39 P5V 15 ENB 10 CARD PRO
49 KEY AD2 29 ND DRIVE+ 40 TALLY LED 16 XENB 11 GND
50 KEY AD1 30 N.C 41 CAM2.7V 17 XSTV 12 CARD DET
51 N.C 31 N.C 42 Y GY OUT 18 STV
CN300 32 N.C 43 GY GND 19 CKV2
1 W 33 N.C 44 GY GND 20 CKV1
2 W CN1501 45 SHOE UNREG 21 COM
3 COIL COM 1 BL5V 46 SHOE UNREG 22 BL5V
4 SENS GARD 2 COM 47 SHOE UNREG 23 BL5V
5 SENS COM 3 CKV1 48 SHOE UNREG CN62
6 DPG 4 CKV2 49 SHOE GND 1 COM
7 DFG 5 STV 50 SHOE GND 2 CKV1
8 V 6 XSTV 51 SHOE GND 3 CKV2
9 V 7 XENB 52 SHOE GND 4 STV
10 U 8 ENB 53 SHOE ID 1 5 XSTV
11 U 9 VBB 54 SHOE ST VDHGL 6 XENB
CN301 10 DSD 55 SHOE ST STSP 7 ENB
1 LOAD (+) 11 XDSG 56 SHOE ID 2 8 CSV
2 LOAD (+) 12 DSG 57 SHOE MIC GND 9 VBB
3 MSW VSS 13 VSS 58 SHOE MIC GND 10 DSD
4 MSW VCC 14 B 59 SHOE MIC LCH 11 XDSG
5 MSW SENS 15 R 60 SHOE MIC RCH 12 DSG
6 LOAD (−) 16 G 61 N.C 13 B
7 LOAD (−) 17 VDD CN2953 14 R
8 DEW + 18 CKH2 1 ST UNREG 15 G
9 DEW − 19 VSS 2 ST UNREG 16 CSH
10 N.C 20 CKH1 3 ST POP SW 17 VDD
CN302 21 STH 4 ST POP CONT 18 CKH2
1 CFG1 22 XSTH 5 P5V 19 CKH1
2 CFG VCC 23 XSTH 6 ST STSP 20 VSS
3 CFG GND CN1601 7 ST EFCHG 21 STH
4 CFG2 1 P5V 8 ST VDHGL VL 22 XSTH
5 V− 2 GND 9 ST GND
6 V+ 3 RMC IN2 10 ST GND
7 U− 4 MF LED B 11 GND
8 U+ 5 MF B 12 P5V
9 C H+ 6 MF LED A 13 RMC IN
10 W+ 7 MF A CN3201
11 W− 8 DVDD2.7 1 DC −
12 C H− CN1602 2 DC J DET
13 V COIL 1 P HALL IN− 3 DC +
14 V COIL 2 P HALL OUT + CN3202
15 W COIL 3 P HALL OUT − 1 BATT −
16 W COIL 4 P HALL IN + 2 BATT −
17 U COIL 5 P DRIVE A 3 BATT +
18 U COIL 6 P DRIVE B 4 BATT +
7 Y DRIVE B 5 BATT INFO AD
8 Y DRIVE A 6 BATT E3
9 Y HALL IN +
10 Y HALL OUT −
11 Y HALL OUT +
12 Y HALL IN −
CAMERA SECTION-1 MVX3i E
CCD OUTPUT SIGNAL
CCD FPC UNIT CCD P.C.B.

CN1101 CN1100 CN1000
TO B11 PBLK PBLK 4 30 VSUBC
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B. B12 +4.7V +4.7V 5 5 +4.7V +4.7V
CN1000 B14 H1 H1 8 19 15V 15V
B17 XSG3 XSG3 10 20 +2.7V +2.7V 1
B19 H2 H2 12 24 −7V −7V Q1002
PCFD
A18 OS1 OS1 16 21 OFD 22 CFOX V2 4 13 V4 OFD 4
A16 15V 15V 19 10 XSG3
XSG2 V4 5 14 V3B Q1003
A13 +2.7V +2.7V 20 23 XSG2 13 VH18X
A11 OFD OFD 21 25 XV4 XV4 V3B 7 15 V3A OCFD 3
A9 XSG2 XSG2 23 31 XSG4
14 V4X IC1005 IC1000
A8 −7V −7V 24 32 XV3
XSG3
15 VH3AX LR36685 V3A 8 16 V2 CCD
A7 XV4 XV4 25 33 XV2 XV3 V-DRIVER V1B 9 17 V1B RJ24N3DADPT OD1 1 15V
18 V3X
A3 OS2 OS2 28 34 XV1
XSG1 V1A 10 18 V1A
A1 VSUBC VSUBC 30 39 XSG1 19 VH1AX OD2 10 15V
RS1
B1 XSG4 XSG4 31 8 H1 XV1 2 RS1
20 V1X
B2 XV3 XV3 32 12 H2 H1O OS1 20
XV2 5 H1
B3 XV2 XV2 33 36 RG 21 V2X
H2O
B5 XV1 XV1 34 4 PBLK DIS XSG4 7 H2 OS2 11
23 VH38X
B7 RG RG 36 28 OS2 RS1
9 RS2
B9 XSG1 XSG1 39 16 OS1
IC1002
SN74LVC2G04DCK
CMOS LOGIC
H1O
1 6
3 4
Q1004
IC1004
SN74LVC2G04DCK
CMOS LOGIC
1 6
H2O IC1006
OPA685N
3 4 OPE AMP
5
3
IC1003 1
SN74AHC1G04HDCK
CMOS LOGIC 4
RS1
2 4
IC1001
OPA685N
OPE AMP
5

CAMERA SECTION-2 MVX3i E
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL CCD OUTPUT SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (1/10)
C10 CCDIN A
B0 B K1 19 CH B(0) DATA(0) 44
CN1000 H10 CCDIN B
B1 B K2 20 CH B(1) DATA(1) 45
TO B11 PBLK
CAMERA SECTION-1
CN1101 A3 OS2 B2 B H3 21 CH B(2) DATA(2) 46
XSHP
A18 OS1 A1 SHP A
B3 B J3 22 CH B(3) DATA(3) 47
A1 VSUBC
J2 SHP B
A7 XV4 34 VSUBC B4 B K3 25 CH B(4) DATA(4) 48
XSHD
A9 XSG2 PBLK 35 B1 SHD A
38 XSUB B5 B H4 26 CH B(5) DATA(5) 49
A11 OFD
CLPOB 36 J1 SHD B
B1 XSG4 40 XV1 B6 B J4 27 CH B(6) DATA(6) 50
ADCCK
B2 XV3 CLPDM 37 D1 ADCC
41 XV2 B7 B K4 28 CH B(7) DATA(7) 51
B3 XV2 CLPDM
XSHP 9 F3 CLPD
B5 XV1 42 XV3 CAM 2.7V B8 B H5 29 CH B(8) DATA(8) 55
CLPOB
B9 XSG1 XSHD 10 G1 CLPO
43 XV4 B9 B K5 30 CH B(9) DATA(9) 56
B17 XSG3 PBLK
ADCLK 11 G2 PBLK
A8 −7V −7V 45 XSG1 4 B10 B J5 31 CH B(10) DATA(10) 57
A13 +2.7V +2.7V VDD
46 XSG2 B11 B J6 32 CH B(11) DATA(11) 58
A16 15V 15V IC1001 XIN 22 3 OUT ST 1 E3 STB
B12 +5V +5V 47 XSG3 LD704EA B12 B K6 34 CH B(12) DATA(12) 59
B7 RG
48 XSG4
TG B13 B H6 35 CH B(13) DATA(13) 60
B14 H1
H2
IC1004
B19 H2 3 H1 K50-3CS-SE72.0 B0 A B2 18 CH A(0) DATA(14) 61
H1
DCLK 20
72MHz X'tal OSC IC1000
4 H2
TGCLK 25 VSP2254 B1 A A2 17 CH A(1) DATA(15) 62 EDATA M(0) to (15) TO
RG
7 RG CDS/AD B2 A B3 16 CH A(2) RAWDATA(0) 65 MAIN P.C.B.
TGS0
32 DATIN0 B3 A A3 15 CH A(3) RAWDATA(1) 66
TGS1
31 DATIN1 B4 A C4 14 CH A(4) RAWDATA(2) 67
TGFID
30 DATIN2 B5 A B4 11 CH A(5) RAWDATA(3) 68
XTGVD
29 DATIN3 XRST 18 B6 A A4 10 CH A(6) RAWDATA(4) 69
TO TGCLK XTGHD
CAMERA SECTION-3 28 TG HD B7 A C5 9 CH A(7) RAWDATA(5) 70
XTGHD
MAIN P.C.B. VGATE
XTGVD 27 VGAT B8 A B5 8 CH A(8) RAWDATA(6) 71
VGATE
B9 A A5 7 CH A(9) RAWDATA(7) 72
TGS0
TGS1 B10 A C6 6 CH A(10) RAWDATA(8) 74
TGCLK
TGFID
B11 A B6 1 CH A(11) RAWDATA(9) 75
RAWDATA(0)to(11)
B12 A A6 80 CH A(12) RAWDATA(10) 76
B13 A A7 79 CH A(13) RAWDATA(11) 77

P2 XSG2 TG XRST V11
EADDR M(0)
CLPDM ADDRESS 40 EADDR M (0) TO
P3 XSG1 TGCLK EN N8 36 C SYNC CAMERA SECTION-3
TGCLK WRITE 39
XEWRL M IC1005 DVDD2.7V XEWRL M
MAIN P.C.B.
AFE STANDBY R11 3 TG CLK
XERD M TC7SH04FU XERD M
CCD−7V IC103 (1/3) DCLK
5 MPXCLK
READ 38 CMOS LOGIC
TMP1962F10XB DVDD2.7V 5
Q1000 CCM MI-COM AGC XRST T11 24 XRST VCC
Q1001 D12 VLON IC1002 5 4 2

MB87J8832 VCC
VIN 5 P5V
MPX
USB XCS
2
CAM 4.6 ON C11 1 ON/OFF
−7V CS 37 4 EADDR M (22) TO
VOUT 4 +5V MPEG4/USB SECTION
1 USB XCS
MAIN P.C.B.
F16 IC1003 IC1006
TK11146CS TC7SH32FU
4.6V REGULATOR CMOS LOGIC

CAMERA SECTION-3 DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
MVX3i E
MAIN P.C.B. (2/10)
VIC 27MOUT TO
TCK AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
301 152 230 151 300 64 229 150 299 228 149 62 298 227 61 297 226 147 60 59 146 58 145 295 224 57 223 294 56 143 222 55 MAIN P.C.B.
TMS
MDATA L0
MDATA L1
MDATA L2
MDATA L3
MDATA L4
MDATA L5
MDATA L6
MDATA L7
MDATA L8
MDATA L9
MDATA L10
MDATA L11
MDATA L12
MDATA L13
MDATA L14
MDATA L15
MDATA L16
MDATA L17
MDATA L18
MDATA L19
MDATA L20
MDATA L21
MDATA L22
MDATA L23
MDATA L24
MDATA L25
MDATA L26
MDATA L27
MDATA L28
MDATA L29
MDATA L30
MDATA L31
EDATA(8) EDATA (8) to (15)
EDATA S0 205 EADDR (0) to (2)
EDATA(9)
EDATA S1 34 XERD
EDATA(10) XEWRU
EDATA S2 123
EDATA(11) TRST
85 MDATA U0 EDATA S3 204
EDATA(12) XECS 1
315 MDATA U1 EDATA S4 33 VIC TDO
EDATA(13)
169 MDATA U2 EDATA S5 122 XEINT S
EDATA(14) AUD AIF TO MACS
EDATA(15) AUD MACS TO AIF
245 MDATA U5 EADDR(0)
EADDR S0 207
EADDR S1 126
EADDR S2 36
313 MDATA U8
XEINT S 279
244 MDATA U9 XECS 1
XECS S 206
167 MDATA U10
XEWRU
81 MDATA U11 XEWR S 125
XERD
166 MDATA U12 XERD S 124
312 MDATA U13 VIC TD0
TDI 184
165 MDATA U14 VIC 27MOUT
VCLK 121
242 MDATA U15 VIC 27MOUT
TRST 185
311 MDATA U16 MACS A (0) to (7)
79 MDATA U17 TCK 101 AUD MACS TO MPEG TO
MPEG4/USB SECTION
164 MDATA U18 TMS 9 MAIN P.C.B.
241 MDATA U19 AUDI1 20
310 MDATA U20
AUDO2 268
163 MDATA U21
240 MDATA U22
77 MDATA U23 AUDO1 21
162 MDATA U24
ADATA0 116 MACS A (0)to(7)
309 MDATA U25
ADATA1 271
76 MDATA U26
161 MDATA U27 ADATA2 197
308 MDATA U28 ADATA3 25 EADDR M (0)

238 MDATA U29 XEWRL M
ADATA4 270
XERD M TO
75 MDATA U30 IC1102(1/3) ADATA5 24
CAMERA SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
R8 DQ1 160 MDATA U31 MB87M1286PBT R8 DQ1
N7 DQ2 DIGIC DV ADATA6 23

N7 DQ2 TRST TO
TMS SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
ADATA7 113 MAIN P.C.B.
R9 DQ3 R9 DQ3
A0 G8 TCK
N8 DQ4 N8 DQ4 EADDR M (0) to (22)
A1 G9 EDATA M (0) to (15)
P9 DQ5 P9 DQ5
A2 F7 174 MADDR U0 EADDR M0 213
291 RDY
MDQM L(0)
M8 DQ6 EADDR M1 213
219 M8 DQ6 DQM0 K9 XEINT (1)
A3 F3 89 MADDR U1
MDQM L(1) XEINT (0)
M7 DQ7 250 MADDR U2 EADDR M2 213
52 M7 DQ7 DQM1 K1
A4 G1 MACS XCS
EADDR M3 213
139 MDQM L(2)
L8 DQ8 88 MADDR U3 L8 DQ8 DQM2 F8 XEWRL M
A5 G2 EADDR M4 213
290 MDQM L(3) XEWRU M
L2 DQ9 249 MADDR U4 L2 DQ9 DQM3 F2
A6 G3 EADDR M5 213
218 MACS XRST
172 MADDR U5 XMWE L
M3 DQ10 M3 DQ10 WE K8 MACS TDO
A7 H1 317 MADDR U6 EADDR M6 213
51
XMCAS L XERD M
M2 DQ11 EADDR M7 213
289 M2 DQ11 CAS K7
A8 H2 87 MADDR U7
XMRAS L
P1 DQ12 248 MADDR U8 EADDR M8 213
217 P1 DQ12 RAS J9
A9 J3 XMCS L
N2 DQ13 86 MADDR U9 EADDR M9 213
137 N2 DQ13 CS J8
A10 G7 EADDR M10 213
49 MCKE L
R1 DQ14 316 MADDR U10 R1 DQ14 CKE J2
BA0 H8 247 MADDR U11 EADDR M11 213
136
N3 DQ15 N3 DQ15
BA1 J7 170 MADDR U12 EADDR M12 213
288 A0 G8
R2 DQ16 MDQM L(0) EADDR M13 213
216 R2 DQ16
DQM0 K9 253 MDQR U0 A1 G9
E8 DQ17 MDQM L(1) EADDR M14 213
135 E8 DQ17
DQM1 K1 1 MDQR U1 A2 F7
D7 DQ18 EADDR M15 213
215 D7 DQ18
MDQM L(2) 92 MDQR U2
DQM2 F8 EADDR M16 213
287 A3 F3
D8 DQ19 MDQM L(3) 176 MDQR U3 D8 DQ19
DQM3 F2 EADDR M17 213
47 A4 G1
B9 DQ20 252 MCKE U B9 DQ20
XMWE L EADDR M18 213
46
WE K8 91 XMCS U A5 G2
C8 DQ21 XMCAS L EADDR M19 213
134 C8 DQ21
CAS K7 251 XMRAS U A6 G3
A9 DQ22 XMRAS L EADDR M20 213
214 A9 DQ22
RAS J9 319 XMCAS U A7 H1
C7 DQ23 EADDR M21 213
133 C7 DQ23
XMCS L 90 XMWE U
CS J8 EADDR M22 213 A8 H2
A8 DQ24 MCKE L A8 DQ24
CKE J2 EDATE M0 285 A9 J3
A2 DQ25 A2 DQ25
EDATE M1 44 A10 G7
C3 DQ26 C3 DQ26
CLK J1 320 MCLK U EDATE M2 132 BA0 H8
A1 DQ27 EDATE M3 43 A1 DQ27
BA1 J7
C2 DQ28 EDATE M4 212 C2 DQ28
B1 DQ29 EDATE M5 131 B1 DQ29

180 RAWDATA0 EDATE M6 42
D2 DQ30 D2 DQ30
D3 DQ31 D3 DQ31
E2 DQ32 4 RAWDATA3 EDATE M9 283 E2 DQ32
255 RAWDATA4 EDATE M10 41 IC1101

IC1103 179 RAWDATA5 EDATE M11 210
MD56V62320E
MD56V62320E J1 CLK SDRAM
SDRAM
2 RAWDATA10
RDY 142
93 RAWDATA11
XEINT1 221
6 TGCLK XEINT0 54
7 TGCHD MACS XCS
XECS M 141
182 TGCVD
XEWRL M 292
258 TGFID
XEWRU M 220
8 VGATE
183 TGS1 XERD M 53
TO RAWDATA (0) to (11)
CAMERA SECTION-2 MACS XRST
TGCLK 100 TGS0 XRESET 22
MAIN P.C.B.
MADDRL12
MADDRL11
MADDRL10
MADDRL9
MADDRL8
MADDRL7
MADDRL6
MADDRL5
MADDRL4
MADDRL3
MADDRL2
MADDRL1
MADDRL0
XTGHD MACS TDO

XMRAS L
XMCAS L
MDQML0
MDQML1
MDQML2
MDQML3
XMWE L
TDO 102
MCKE L
XMCS L
MCLK L
XTGVD
TGFID
VGATE
237 74 159 73 306 158 305 235 71 231 66 153 67 154 68 303 233 155 69 304 234 156 236
TGS1
TGS0

LENS DRIVE SECTION MVX3i E
MAIN P.C.B. (3/10) TEMP SENS
CN1602
ZOOM SENS
IC1603 (1/3) P DRIVE A 5
TO P SENS P DRIVE B 6
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 LMV324MT ZOOM MOTOR
Y SENS Y DRIVE B 7
MAIN P.C.B. OPE AMP
I PSB Y DRIVE A 8
P PWM P HALL IN+ 4
Y PWM P HALL IN− 1
P DRIVE A
PWM FA OUT1F 4 13 P HALL OUT− 3
PWM FB 2 EN1 P DRIVE B 14 2 P HALL OUT+ 2
OUT1R 6
PWM ZA 12 Y HALL OUT− 10
Y DRIVE B
PWM ZB 22 EN3 OUT3R 19 1 Y HALL OUT+ 11
Y GYRO IC1601 Y DRIVE A IC1603 (3/3) 3 Y HALL IN− 12
P GYRO 3 IN1 BH6564FV-F OUT3F 20
CAM Y HALL IN+ 9
FOCUS MOTOR
4 VCC
I SW MOTOR DRIVE VM1 5 3V
FOCUS SENS
CAM REF 21 IN3 5
VM2 8
DA LOAD 10 7
IG METER IS UNIT
F RES SW VM3 18 P 5V 8 6
Z RES SW 9 LENS UNIT
IC1603 (2/3)
3 A03 A04 4
PWM FA
TO PANEL/EVF/IS CLK 3 IN1 FOCUS A
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION OUT1F 4 DA LOAD
PANEL/EVF/IS SO PWM FB 12 LD A01 15
MAIN P.C.B. 10 IN2 FOCUS −A
F RES SW
PWM ZA
OUT1R 6 PANEL/EVF/IS CLK
13 CLK IC1602 A02 2
Z RES SW 21 IN3 FOCUS −B M62367GP
OUT2R 7 PANEL/EVF/IS SO DA CFG
PWM ZB 14 DI A07 7
15 IN4 FOCUS B D/A CONVERTER
IC1301 OUT2F 9
8 VDD A06 6
DA SREEL DA CFG TO SERVO SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
2 EN1 BH6564FV-F OUT4F 16
ZOOM B
DA TREEL
DA SREEL
AVDD 2.7V 9 VCC A05 5 DA TREEL
11 EN2 MOTOR DRIVE ZOOM −B
OUT4R 17
22 EN3 ZOOM −A
OUT3R 19
14 EN4 ZOOM A
OUT3F 20
Y GYRO
20 20 28 28 CN1200
P GYRO FOCUS A+ 1
19 19 27 27
FOCUS A+ 2
I SW
18 18 46 46 P 2.7V FOCUS A− 3
IC103 (2/3) CAM REF FOCUS B− 4
32 32 15 15 CAM 2.7V
TMP1962F10XB FOCUS B+ 5
CCM MI-COM 8 8 21 21 ZOOM A+ 6
A10 B10 IG DRIVE− ZOOM A− 7
9 9 IC1201 1 1
ZOOM B− 8
F PSB
Z PSB
IENC A8 10 10 BH9910KV 2 2
IG DRIVE+
ZOOM B+ 9
IRIS DRIVE IG HALL IN− IG DRIVE− 10
5 5
A13 LED RET IRIS OP C9 33 33 IG DRIVE+ 11
IG HALL OUT+
4 4 IG HALL IN− 12
E11 Z RES SW IRIS CL B9 34 34
IG HALL OUT− IG HALL OUT+ 13
6 6
E10 F RES SW CAM TXD T10 35 35 IG HALL OUT− 14
IG HALL IN+
3 3 IG HALL IN+ 15
E9 TEMP CAM SCK P10 36 36
ND HALL OUT+ 28
R6 DA LD IRIS IC LD P6 37 37 ND HALL IN− 25
ND HALL IN+ 27
ND B8 Q1001
ND HALL OUT− 26
TALLY LED D11 ND DRIVE + 29
DVDD 2.7V FOCUS VCC 17
TEMP VCC 19
GY P.C.B.
ZOOM VCC 22
CAM 2.7V F RES SW
6
TEMP
FOCUS SENS 16 IC1611
7
Z RES SW
TEMP 20 ENC 03JB
IC1203 (3/3) 5 ZOOM SENS 21 Y SENSOR GYRO
2 CAM 2.7V ZOOM LED 23
LED RET
13 IC1205 (2/2) FOCUS LED 18
14 1 2 4 OUT VCC 1
15 16 12 3 1
VCC 3
CLK 3 8 CN2952 CN1611
LED101
2 LO
5 IC1205 (1/2) Y GY OUT 42 3 Y GY OUT
DI 4 7 TALLY LED 40 5 TALLY LED
NJM3414AV
VCC 6 CAM 2.7V CAM 2.7V 41 4 CAM 2.7V
IC1202 OPE AMP
A03 11 4 IC1203 (1/3) P 5V P 5V 39 6 P 5V
M62368GP LMV324MT
D/A A04 12 CAM 2.7V
CONVERTER 10
A01 5
8 4 V OUT V IN 5 P 5V
A02 6 9
IC1203 (2/3) IC1200

TK11146CS CN2951
4.6V REGULATOR P GY OUT 2 TO W-LED FPC UNIT

MPEG4/USB SECTION MVX3i E
USB SIGNAL DIGITAL DV SIGNAL DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL CPU BUS SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (4/10)
EADDR M (22) TO
EADDR M (0) TO (6) MAIN P.C.B.
LJ-1 P.C.B.
MACS A (0)to(7) C11 CAMPXL0 HDAT0 K12 EDATA M (0)to(15) EDATA M (0) TO (15)
C13 CAMPXL1 HDAT1 K13
C14 CAMPXL2 HDAT2 K14 CN2952 CN2971 CN2973

EDATA M (0)to(15) 23 D0 VBUS 5 V BUS 2 10 VBWS (+5V) VBUS (+5V) 1
B12 CAMPXL3 HDAT3 J12
D− 5 8 D- D− 2
24 D1 D− 3
B13 CAMPXL4 HDAT4 J13 D+ 6 7 D+ D+ 3
25 D2 D− 4 5 XTPB
USB JACK
A12 CAMPXL5 HDAT5 J14
4 TPB
26 D3 TRON 6 TO
A13 CAMPXL6 HDAT6 H12 3 TPA
27 D4 MAIN P.C.B. 2 XTPA
TO A14 CAMPXL7 HDAT7 H13
CN2952 CN2972
CAMERA SECTION-3 MACS A (0) to (7) 28 D5
MAIN P.C.B. AUD MACS TO MPEG
F2 ADSDI HDAT8 H14 XTPB 1 DV JACK
VIC 27MOUT 29 D6 XDACK1 8 USB XDACK1 TO TPB 2
VIC 27MOUT R12 PLLFN HDAT9 G12 SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
USB XDREQ1 MAIN P.C.B. XTPA 3
WCK 30 D7 XDREQ1 9
E15 CAMCLK HDAT10 G13 USB XDREQ0 TPA 4
TO LRCK
WCK 31 D8 XDREQ0 47 USB XDACK0
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 F3 ADSCLK HDAT11 F12
MAIN P.C.B. USB XINFO
LRCK 32 D9 XDACK0 48
E2 ADLRCLK HDAT12 F13 USB XCS
33 D10 XINFO 42
J1 NWCLK HDAT13 F14
IC3500
34 D11
HDAT14 E14 M66291GP
HDAT15 B14
37 D12 USB I/F
IOVCC2 35
38 D13
XTC1 10
39 D14
IOVCC1 12 DVDD2.7V USB XCS TO
40 D15 CAMERA SECTION-2
EADDR M (22) MAIN P.C.B.
COREVCC1 1
HAD1 P15 EADDR M (0)to(6) EADDR M (0)to(5) 17 A1
HAD2 N15 IC404 18 A2

COREVCC2 16 USB3.3V
TC7SH32FU
HAD3 M13 19 A3
CMOS LOGIC
HAD4 M14 20 A4
XCS 45
HAD5 M15 2 21 A5
4
HAD6 L12 22 A6
1 EADDR M (22) 1
XRST 46
HAD7 L13 4
XRD 43 2
/HCS P13
IC400 XHWR/XBYTE 41
TC35280XB XLWR 44 IC3501
MPEG4 TC7SH32FU
CMOS LOGIC
TO
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 VIC A(0)to(7) VIC A (0)to(7) D9 DISPPXL0 EADDR M (22)
MAIN P.C.B. AUD MPEG TO VIC
E8 DISPPXL1
XRESET TO
D8 DISPPXL2 MAIN P.C.B.
C8 DISPPXL3
/HRD R11
B8 DISPPXL4 XRESET TO
/HWR P14 MPEG XCS MAIN P.C.B.
D7 DISPPXL5
XERD M
C7 DISPPXL6 HINT N10 XEWRU M
XEWRL M
B7 DISPPXL7
/RESET M2 MPEG INT
AUD MPEG TO VIC
E4 ADSD0 MPEG RESET
SYSCLKEN J4 MPEG SYSCLKEN

SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MVX3i E
CPU BUS SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (5/10)

PANEL/EVF/IS SO TO
PANEL/EVF/IS CLK EVF SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
SHOE ON
195 272 200 118 28 CSYNC
CK3V
PANEL B
TDI
XDEBEN
DEBDD
DEBUD
DEBCLK
MTOV DATA
TO 19 RX PANEL G
POWER SUPPLY SECTION BATT E3 U3 L6 K4 K3 B3 N1 C3 A4 L2 L4 V6 V10 U10 P7 A11 P8 R8 T8 N5 A14 J4 E12 VTOM DATA PANEL R
MAIN P.C.B. 325 TX
INIT-CHG2
ST EFCHG2
INIT-CHG1
INIT-CHG2
CHAGE
BATT INFO AD
DC J DET
A/D I
A/D V
CAM POW ON
MOTV EN
VIC FRAME
VIC PARALLEL
VIC FREEZE
CTOV EN
FR FM END
VTOC SCK
VTOC DATA
CTOV DATA
VTOC EN
VIC3 REQ
NTSC X PAL
CTOV RX
VTOM SCK
INIT-CHG1 E 3V 192 UAT CLK PANEL/EVF/IS SO TO
CHAGE/BATT MOTV EN PANEL/EVF/IS CLK LENS DRIVE SECTION
Q103 Q105 Q104 57 SYSCLK MAIN P.C.B.
BATT INFO AD
VIC FRAME
DC J DET 59 D2 CN103
PANEL/EVF/IS SO
A/D I CARD WP1 C14 VIC PARALLEL SO1 188 PANEL/EVF/IS SO 37 TO
Q101 Q100 347 D1 R-KEY P.C.B.
A/D V PANEL/EVF/IS CLK PANEL/EVF/IS CLK 36
EXP DIAL B4 VIC FREEZE SCLK1 189 CN70
VTR ON CAM2.7V E3 DBGE 226 D0 CSYNC 29
CAM ON KEY AD0 C5 CTOV EN PANEL B 26
F2 DRESET 348 LREQ
SHDE ON PANEL G 25
KEY AD1 A6 FR FM END
D3 SDI DINT 11 CDATA1 PANEL R 24
KEY AD2 B6 VTOC SCK VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 46
CN101
E1 DCLK 12 SCLK3 IC2301 (1/4) VTR UNREG 45
N.C 1 DEBCLK C1 PCST0
KEY AD3 C6 VTOC DATA
13 SO3 MB87M1255 LCD 12V LCD 12 33
2 DEBUD KEY AD4 D6 CTOV DATA VIC3 LCD 2.7V LCD 2.7V 32
E2 PCST1 105 SI3
3 DEBDD LCD 2.7V 31
CARD MOVIE/STILL SW K2 VTOC EN
4 XDEBEN D2 PCST2 108 SCS1 LCD 2.7V 30
LCD ON
7 DBGE CARD GATE D14 VIC3 REQ SI0 189 LCD ON 42
C2 PCST3 264 SCS0
8 DRESET LCD BL ON LCD BL ON 41
CARD DET1 E13 NTSC X PAL CTL0 145
11 SDI DINT D1 SDAO TPC 117 ICS2 LCD EEP SIN 40
LCD EEP SIN
12 DCLK EADDR M(0) P14 CTOV RX ST1 14 LCD EEP CS 39
L3 VTR POW ON 42 XECS3
13 PCST0 LCD EEP CS LCD CS 38
EADDR M(1) R14 SCS10 323
14 PCST1 F3 SYSRDY 49 AIN9 PANEL BT SW 23
LCD CS
15 PCST2 EADDR M(2) T14 SCS9 15 PANEL OPEN SW 22
F5 PJ2 BOOT
16 PCST3 PANEL BT SW KEY AD2 49
EADDR M(3) P15 AIN11 284
17 SDAO TPC M1 XRESET CARD PRO 47
PANEL OPEN SW
19 VTR ON EADDR M(4) R15 AIN10 216 EXP DIAL 21
P9 VTOM SCK
20 SYSRDY KEY AD4 20
EADDR M(5) T15
VTR ON
21 PI2 BOOT R9 VTOM DATA CARD MO/ST SW 19
22 XRESET EADDR M(6) U15 CARD FUTA DET 18
T9 MTOV DATA
23 VTOM SCK CARD DET 17
EADDR M(7) V15
24 VTOM ATA B16 TBUSY KEY AD1 51
25 MTOV DATA DIAL AD0 EADDR M(8) R16 KEY AD1 50
A7 P GYRO
26 TBUSY LI 3V LI 3V 48
DIAL AD1 EADDR M(9) T16
27 TBUSY B7 Y GYRO DVDD2.7V MMC VDD 16
MMC SCK
9 RESET MEM ACC LED EADDR M(10) U16 MCCLK A 14 MMC DAT1 13
D13 CARD ACCESS
10 E3+LI MMC RSV MMC DAT 11
EADDR M(11) V16 MCDT A3 105
C6 KEY AD3 MMC SCK 7
MMC DAT2
CN102 Q110
VTR
IC102 J2 DIAL CCW SW
EADDR M(12) T17 IC1102 (2/3) MCDT A2 188 MMC DAT2 4
TO 7 MEM ACC LED UNREG 5 VCC BD4746G VOUT 4
EADDR M(13) U17 MB87M1286PBT MCDT A1 263
MMC DAT1 MMC CMD 3
LOWER RIGHT COVER ASS'Y 10 DIAL AD1 RESET J3 DIAL CW SW DIGIC DV MMC DAT
MMC RSV 2
9 DIAL AD0 EADDR M(14) V17 MCDT A0 15
C5 KEY AD0
6 KEY AD3 MMC CMD
EADDR M(15) T18 MCCMD A 189
5 DIAL CCW P1 P.AE/GREEN SW
4 DIAL CW EADDR M(16) R17
N3 EJECT SW
3 KEY AD0 MICOM UNREG EADDR M(22) TO
T/C POW SW EADDR M(17) R18 MPEG4/USB SECTION-4
2 P.AE/GREEN SW N4 TAPE/CARD SW EADDR M(0)to(6)
DVDD MAIN P.C.B.
LI 3V 2.5V ZOOM AD EADDR M(18) P16
E8 ZOOM KEY
13
EADDR M(19) P17
CN100 T13 HALF PHOTO SW
VIN
TO 7 EJECT SW 12 VOUT EADDR M(20) P18 EDATA M(0)to(15) TO

L FPC UNIT VBAT 3 R13 PHOTO SW CAMERA SECTION-2
6 TAPE/CARD SW IC100 EADDR M(21) N14 MPEG4/USB SECTION
4 ZOOM AD TK11125CS IC101 LIDET 2 V13 LI3V DETECT MAIN P.C.B.
3 CK 3V 2.5V REGULATOR BD4189FV EADDR M(22) N15
CS 4 G5 E3 DET
2 HALF PHOTO SW BACKUP Q102 EDATA M(0) N16
EDATA M(0)
E2 DQ0 EADDR M(0)
1 PHOTO SW SW OUT 6 A16 SW DET A0 E1
DVDD EDATA M(1)
5 VIN VOUT 4 7 VDC EDATA M(1) N17 H2 DQ1 EADDR M(1)
2.7V RESET 11 G1 RESET A1 D1
CN2900 EDATA M(2)
EDATA M(2) M14 E3 DQ2 EADDR M(2)
N.C A4 T/C POW SW IC103(3/3) EDATA M(3)
A2 C1
B9 TDI TMP1962F10XB EDATA M(3) M16 H3 DQ3
A3 A1
EADDR M(3)
B2 MODE RESET CCM MI-COM EDATA M(4) M17
EDATA M(4)
H4 DQ4 EADDR M(4)
A6 FCH0 H13 FCH0 A4 B1
EDATA M(5)
B10 TDO EDATA M(5) M18 E4 DQ5 EADDR M(5)
D17 TDO A5 D2
A3 CAM POW SW EDATA M(6)
IC104 EDATA M(6) L14 H5 DQ6 EADDR M(6)
A5 CAM POW SW A6 C2
TC7WH14FK VCC 8 DVDD2.7V
EDATA M(7)
EDATA M(7) L16 E5 DQ7 EADDR M(7)
CN1601
CMOS LOGIC EDATA M(8)
A7 A2
MF B EDATA M(8) L17 F2 DQ8 EADDR M(8)
TO MF FPC UNIT 5 MF B 1 7 T2 MF IN1 A8 B5
EDATA M(9)
7 MF A EDATA M(9) L18 G2 DQ9 EADDR M(9)
MF A A9 A5
4 MF LED B 3 5 T1 MF IN0 EDATA M(10)
EDATA M(10) K14 F3 DQ10 EADDR M(10)
6 MF LED A A10 C5
MF LED A EDATA M(11)
3 RMC IN2 EDATA M(11) K15 G3 DQ11 EADDR M(11)
Q111 A11 D5
EDATA M(12)
MF LED B EDATA M(12) K16 F4 DQ12 EADDR M(12)
A12 MF LED ON A12 B6
EDATA M(13)
EDATA M(13) K18 G5 DQ13 EADDR M(13)
Q106 A13 A6
EDATA M(14)
EDATA M(14) J14 F5 DQ14 EADDR M(14)
B11 RMC PULSE IN2 A14 C6
EDATA M(15)
EDATA M(15) J16 G6 DQ15 EADDR M(15)
IC105 A15 D6
TO
MPEG4/USB SECTION
USB XINTO C15 USB XINT FM XCS G15 MBM29LV160BE70PBT A16 E6
EADDR M(16)
USB XDREQ0 FM XCS
MAIN P.C.B. R3 XDREQ0 FM XRST R12 F1 CE 16M FLASH EADDR M(17)
USB XDACK0 A17 B2
FM XRST
USB XDREQ1 R4 XDACK0 XERD M H17 B4 RESET EADDR M(18)
A18 C3
USB XDACK1 XEWRU M
U5 XDREQ1 XEWRU M H15 A4 WE EADDR M(19)
USB XCS A19 D4
XERD M
T5 XDACK1 XEWRL M H14 G1 OE
F16 USB XCS MPEG XCS F15

CN2953
CHAGE LED Q108
TO ST FPC UNIT 3 ST POW SW J5 CHAGE LED MPEG INT P5
4 ST POP CONT SHOE ST STSP XERD M TO
R2 ST STSP2 MPEG RESET F18 MPEG4/USB SECTION
6 ST STSP XEWRU M
SHOE ST VDHGL MPEG SYSCLKEN MAIN P.C.B.
7 ST EFCHG A5 ST VDHGL VL2 ADJ SW V14 XEWRL M
8 ST VDHGL VL ST VDHGL VL XRESET
B5 ST VDHGL VL1 MIC1
CASSETTEMEMORY A/D0 E6 MPEG XCS
ST EFCHG
CN2951 V2 ST EFCHG1 MIC2 MPEG INT
CASSETTEMEMORY A/D1 D5
TO W-LED FPC UNIT 20 CHAGE LED ST POP CONT MPEG RESET
U1 POPUP CTL MIC3
22 WHITE LED CASSETTEMEMORY A/D2 C4 MPEG SYSCLKEN
ST POP SW
U2 POPUP SW
MIC2 V4
CN2952 ST STSP MIC 1 TO
R1 ST STSP1 SERVO SECTION
TO SHOE CONNECTOR 54 SHOE ST VDHGL MIC3 U4 MIC 2
ASSEMBLY CAM POW SW MAIN P.C.B.
55 SHOE ST STSP M3 CAM POWER SW MIC 3
MIC ON T4
15 CAM PW LED VTR POW SW CAS IN
M4 VTR POWER SW CAS IN
16 VTR PW LED CASSETTE IN SW N2 MIC ON
WHITE LED Q112
18 S/S SW V3 FLASH LED
21 NET PW SW EDATA M(0)to(15) TO
Q109 CAMERA SECTION-3
19 CAM PW SW VTR PW LED TRST G13 EADDR M(0)to(22)
C12 VTR POW LED MAIN P.C.B.
20 VTR PW SW TRST
TCK C16
TO S JACK P.C.B. 34 HP DET CAM PW LED TMS
CN51 B12 CAM POW LED
TMS E15 TCK
S/S SW RDY
U13 START/STOP TDI D16
XEINT(1)
NET PW SW
J1 NETWORK POWER SW MACS XCS H18 XEINT(0)
MACS XCS
BASS RDY H16
XEWRL M
MACS XRST P11 XEWRU M
MACS XRST
MACS XINT0 B15
MACS TDO
MACS XINT1 A15 XERD M

SERVO SECTION MVX3i E
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
DMC III
MAIN P.C.B.(6/10)
IC300
LB11990W
MOTOR DRIVE U
CN300
DRUM
59 U 11
V U 10
MOTOR
DVS U,V,W, 58
TO DRUM VS 60 V 9
POWER SUPPLY SECTION DRIVER W
CAP VS 56 V 8
MAIN P.C.B.
COM W 2
23
W 1
PG
VCC2 41 VTR UNREG COIL COM 3
DPG 6 FG
DRUM ON POWER TIMING POSITION
TO DRUM ON 16 SW CONT DETECT DFG 7
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 DPG SENS COM 5
MAIN P.C.B.
DFG
DPG
CAP ON 28 PG AMP 30
CAP FWD
DPG
CFG 35 PG AMP 32
UNLOAD
CVS V REG 31
LOAD 44
T REEL FG CN302
U
S REEL FG 55 U 17
TAPE TOP U 18
TAPE END DVD 3V 22 VCC1 V 13
V
TAPE LED 53 V 14 CAPSTAN
REC PROOF W 15 MOTOR
CAS IN 2 POWER W 16
SW W
REEL LED CONT 51 U+ 8
DEW U− 7
U+
MSW AD 50 V+ 6
V− 5 FG
U.V.W. U−
49 W+ 10
DRIVER
W− 11
FWD/RVS V+
40 48 C H+ 9
SW
C H− 12
V−
47 C FG1 1
C FG2 4
W+
46
W−
45
H−
DVDD 2.7V 64 HALL 42
POWER H+
43
CFG2
LOADING
37 MOTOR
36
CFG1
38
3
VCC
5 P5V
CN301
LOD−
61 LOAD (+) 1
DEW SENSOR
4 DECORDER DRIVER LOD+ LOAD (+) 2
63
LOAD (−) 6
10 LOAD (−) 7
9 DEW + 8
11 MSW SENS 5 MODE SW
DVDD 2.7V MSW VCC 4
7
MSW VSS 3
8
6
TO DA SREEL
LENS DRIVE SECTION DATREEL
MAIN P.C.B.
DA CFG
IS 3.0
8 TAPE END
VCC
SENSOR
2
1
Q302
CN2900 3 TAPE TOP
N.C B6 MIC 3 BOT DET CN303 SENSOR
B5 MIC 2 5 BOT E 1
7 DVDD 2.7V BOT C 2
Q302
6 EOT E 20
Q303 Q300
EOT DET IC301 EOT C 21
NJM12903R P5V LED A 14
OPE AMP LED K 15
REC PRF 5 SAFETY
MIC3 4 SW
MIC2 6
MIC1 7
TO MIC 3 C IN 12
MAIN P.C.B.
MIC 2
Q301
T IN− 8 MIC
MIC ON T IN+ 10
MIC 1 T OUT− 9
CAS IN T OUT+ 11
CASSETTE IN SW
S IN− 16
S IN+ 18
S OUT− 17
Q304
S OUT+ 19
FG TAKE UP
REEL
FG SUPPLY
REEL

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MVX3i E
DATA COMMUNICATION ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (7/10)

IC2101 CSYNC I
C SYNC SEP 2
CN2951 LD502U
TO
W-LED FPC UNIT 6 V I/O
V LINE IN
48 CLAMP
VIF2 27MHz 4
VCLK
9 AV L GCA
Y IN
11 AV R EQ LPF 36
8 AV DET
75Ω 75Ω 75Ω Y LINE IN
14 EXT R 46 CLAMP Y CONT
CLAMP Y
16 EXT L Y/C SEP 40
Q2104 Q2103 Q2102
Q853 Q855 REC C
BPF 21
Q852 C LINE IN
10 CLAMP C CONT
Q851 V OUT Y OUT
27 34
CN2952
TO Q854 Y OUT C OUT
SJACK P.C.B. 27 Y I/O 30 17
CN51 24 C I/O
C OUT
37 SP − 25 SERIAL DATA VIC VD
15
38 SP − CLK DATA CS
35 SP +
VCC
36 SP +
4
TO 23 S DET 5 7 11 20 26 31 32 37 45 47 12 13 14 19
SHOE CONNECTOR ASS'Y 53 SHOE ID1
AA2.7V P 5V
56 SHOE ID2 8 VIF 4.7V
59 SHOE MIC LCH
WIDE
60 SHOE MIC RCH 1 5 V REF DETECT AV SCLK
30 HP COM CONT V IN AV SO
Q2100
32 HP COM Vcc VIF CS
4V
31 HP L V OUT 4 6 VIF 4.7V
Q2107
33 HP R
1
IC803
TK11140CS IC802 Q2105
4V REGULATOR NJM2770R AVDD 1.4V
X2301
SP DRIVER 27MHz
10 101 96 5 233 364 298 248 257 154
WIDE CONT
CDATA5
VCLK I
VCLK O
VIC VD
C IN
CLAMP Y
Y IN
VCLK
CSYNC I
Q2101
Q701 185 LET CONT

EXT
DETECT 9 CDATA7 SCLK2 261 AV SCLK
319 CDATA2 IC2301 (2/4) SO2 321 AV SO
291 MIC ATT MB87M1255 SCS3 17 VIF CS

SP STANDBY VIC3
146 D3 SCS2 191 AIF CS
SHOE ID1
339 AIN14
EDATA (15)
SHOE ID2
EDATA (0)
137 AIN8
S DET
259 CDATA6
205 34 275 123 332 204 33 122 32 203 121 331 31 273 202 120
CN2900
A1 V I/O
B8 TMS 267 TMS
N.C A7 TCK
B7 TRST 112 TCK
B3 VTR ON IC3201
250 Y O
AA2.7V AA4.7V 85 C O
VTR ON
88 VRL 2
EADDR (0) 279 EADDR (0) E1 A0
249 VRH 2
129 EADDR (1) D1
15 14 13 39 41 20 58 30 28 42
136 AIN13
210 EADDR (2) C1 DQ0 E2 EDATA (0)
POWER SUPPLY 8 20 PWM4
SECTION 40 EADDR (3) A1 H2 EDATA (1)
MAIN P.C.B. HP AMP
9 337 EADDR (4) B1 E3 EDATA (2)
34 AIF CS
39 EADDR (5) D2 H3 EDATA (3)
CONTROL
16 GAIN AMP LINE AMP DAC REGISTER 35 AV SO
128 EADDR (6) C2 H4 EDATA (4)
33 AV SCLK
HP AMP 209 EADDR (7) A2 E4 EDATA (5)
10
38 EADDR (8) B5 IC2303 H5 EDATA (6)
12 11 MBM29DL162BE70PBT
336 EADDR (9) A5 E5 EDATA (7)
AUDIO MUTE 36 DUAL FLASH
127 EADDR (10) C5 F2 EDATA (8)
208 EADDR (11) D5 G2 EDATA (9)

AD OFF 31 147 LPS
37 EADDR (12) B6 F3 EDATA (10)
REC MUTE 32 280 XECS2
IC801 CR CR 277 EADDR (13) A6 G3 EDATA (11)
AK4561 NETWORK NETWORK
126 EADDR (14) C6 F4 EDATA (12)
AUDIO
INTERFACE CLOCK
24 AMCK
335 EADDR (15) D6 G5 EDATA (13)
DIVIDER
64 1 2 3 4 6 7 40 334 EADDR (16) E6 F5 EDATA (14)
LINE
54
36 EADDR (17) B2 DQ15 G6 EDATA (15)
22 WCK
53 MIC FORM 125 EADDR (18) C3
AUDIO I/F 23 LRCK CAMERA SECTION-3
PRE AMP INV AMP EQ AMP HPF ALC AMP ADC
MIC CONTROL 206 EADDR (19) D4 A19
(L) CN701 61 25
2 INT MIC R EADDR (20) 276 EADDR (20) D3 NC2
MIC 4 INT MIC L 60
26
LINE
(R) 50 49 48 47 46 44 43 38 XECSO 212 F1 CE
XERD 43 G1 OE
VIC 27MOUT
CR CR
NETWORK NETWORK XEWRU 44 A4 WE TCK
Q810,Q811 TMS
TRST 23 B4 RESET
C LKON
EADATA (8) to (15)
XECS1
POWER OFF AUDIO MUTE
Q802 MUTE OFF 211 XECS5 XRESET 135 EADDR (0) to (2)
TDO
MUTE XERD
Q812
292 113 131 XEWRU
TRST
Q801 XECS1
VIC TDO
XEINTS
AUD MACS TO AIF TO
AUD AIF TO MACS CAMERA SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.
XRESET TO
MPEG4/USB SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 MVX3i E
DIGITAL DV SIGNAL DIGITAL(VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL) DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (8/10)
SDRAM2.7V
TO DRUM ON
SERVO SECTION DRUM ON 213 BRQ MDATA0 78 MDATA (0) TO (15) A6 DQ1
MAIN P.C.B. VCC1 H6
DPG DPG
66 DPG MDATA1 241 B7 DQ2
DFG VCC2 A7
DFG
CAP ON 231 DFG MDATA2 163 C7 DQ3
VCC3 R7
CAP FWD CAP ON
270 ICD2 MDATA3 357 D7 DQ4
CFG VCCQ1 C2
CAP FWD
UNLOAD 152 ROFS MDATA4 303 D6 DQ5
VCCQ2 F2
LOAD CFG
67 CFG MDATA5 240 E7 DQ6
T REEL FG VCCQ3 B6
UNLOAD
S REEL FG 26 ICLK MDATA6 162 F7 DQ7
TAPE TOP LOAD
116 ICD3 MDATA7 76 G7 DQ8
TAPE END
S REEL FG
TAPE LED 232 RFGS MDATA8 356 G1 DQ9
REC PROOF T REEL FG
68 RFGT MDATA9 355 F1 DQ10
CAS IN
TAPE TOP
REEL LED CONT 341 AIN0 MDATA10 161 E1 DQ11
DEW TAPE END
MSW AD
286 AIN1 MDATA11 75 D2 DQ12 IC2302
TAPE LED
58 D6 IC2301(3/4) MDATA12 302 D1 DQ13 MD56V62160E
REC PROOF MB87M1255 SDRAM
268 TCLK MDATA13 238 C1 DQ14
VIC3
CAS IN
48 AIN12 MDATA14 160 B1 DQ15
REEL LED CONT
45 BGRNTX MDATA15 74 A2 DQ16
DEW
138 AIN3
MSW AD ADDR0 82 ADDR (0) TO (13) N6 A0
218 AIN2
ADDR1 167 P7 A1
ADDR2 244 P6 A2
P SENS
TO P SENS 285 AIN7
LENS DRIVE SECTION ADDR3 306 R6 A3
Y SENS Y SENS
MAIN P.C.B. 217 AIN6
P GYRO ADDR4 81 R2 A4
P GYRO
Y GYRO 340 AIN5
ADDR5 359 P2 A5
PWM FA Y GYRO XRAS
50 AIN4 RAS K6
PWM FB ADDR6 243 P1 A6
PWM FA DQML
PWM ZA 21 PWM3 LDQM J6
ADDR7 80 N2 A7
PWM ZB PWM FB MCLK
111 PWM2 CLK K2
P PWM ADDR8 305 N1 A8
PWM ZA DQMU
Y PWM 266 PWM1 UDQM J2
ADDR9 165 M2 A9
DA LOAD PWM ZB CKE
194 PWM0 CKE L1
I PSB ADDR10 358 N7 A10
P PWM XCS
I SW 110 PWM6 CS L7
ADDR11 242 M1 A11
F RES SW Y PWM XCAS
193 PWM5 CAS K7
Z RES SW ADDR12 164 M6 A12
DA LOAD XWE
107 SCS6 WE J7
ADDR13 304 M7 A13
I PSB
262 SI2
I SW XRAS 246
322 SO0
F RES SW DQML 360
199 ICS1
Z RES SW MCLK 168
271 ICS0
DQMU 361
XTPA CKE 307

220 XTPA
CN2952
TPA XCS 362
TO 9 TPB 140 TPA
MPEG4/USB SECTION 10 XTPB TPB XCAS 169
MAIN P.C.B. 53 TPB
11 TPA
XTPB XWE 83
12 XTPA 141 XTPB
REC H 63 HA 3.3V HA 4.7V

AUD MPEG TO VIC
TO AUD MPEG TO VIC 227 AUDI I
MPEG4/USB SECTION VIC A (0)to(7) VIC A (0)
LJ-1 P.C.B. 6 ADATA0 36 5 38
CN2971 VIC A (1)
315 ADATA1 REC CONT REC IC2000
UTIL SWP 5 252 32 ON
VIC A (2)
314 ADATA2 LD502W
VIC A (3) RDAT 150 35 VRP2 H1A
179 ADATA3 46
VIC A (4)
255 ADATA4 H1B
45 CN2001
VIC A (5)
95 ADATA5 H1A 2 CH-1 CH-2
H2A HEAD HEAD
VIC A (6) 43 H1B 3
3 ADATA6
VIC A (7) XRDAT 294 34 H2B
H2A 5 DRUM
178 ADATA7 42 H2B 6 UNIT
DERR
TO DERR 296 PWMD
MAIN P.C.B. CERR CERR
153 PWMC
182 BDATA7
BDATA0 202 316 BDATA6 PB ON

PB H 229 1
BDATA1 31 7 BDATA5
D7 346 6
BDATA2 275 317 BDATA4
Q2000
BDATA3 201 99 BDATA3
VIDEO SIGNAL
BDATA4 30 183 BDATA2 TO
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION–2
IC1102 (3/3) BDATA5 119 AMCK 318 BDATA1 IC2301 21
MB87M1286PBT WCK
BDATA6 274 100 BDATA0 AUDIO SIGNAL
DIGIC DV LRCK TO
GCA
BDATA7 200 103 CCLK AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION–1 PBRF 158 17 EPH GDL EQ VCO
CCLK TO IC2301
BDATACLK 276 AUDIO-VIDEO 149 WCK
SWP 65 2
WCK SECTION-1
WCLK 112 62 LRCK
LRCK
LRCLK 194 228 AMCK
AUDI2 111 148 AUD10

29 30 13 11 12 28 8 25 26 22 23
UTIL SWP 4
UTIL SWP 3
UTIL SWP 1
UTIL SWP 2
UTIL SWP 0
XRCLK
RAGC
RAPC
RCLK
TO WCK 230 151 176 353 295 93 1 177 313

MPEG4/USB SECTION LRCK
MAIN P.C.B.
GDH CONT
GDH CONT
GDL CONT
GDL CONT
EQ CONT
EQ CONT
XRCLK
XRCLK
RAGC
EQFC
RAPC
RAGC
RAFC
RCLK
RAPC
EQFC
RAFC
RCLK
CN2900
N.C A10 PBRF
A8 SWP

POWER SUPPLY SECTION MVX3i E
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B.(9/10) FU3207

ST UNREG
SHOE UNREG
Q3211
FU3201 Q3212
FU3203
FU3204
TO CN3201
DC P.C.B. 3 DC + VTR UNREG
DC JACK 2 DC J DET FU3202
1 DC − Q1804
Q1801 FU3205
8 7 6 5
Q1803 FU3206 CERR TO
DERR AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2
MAIN P.C.B.
1 2 3 4 Q1805
6 5 4
LPF MACS 1.4V
34 OSC
46 LPF DVDD 1.4V
D1801 1 2 3
Q1802
CH1 LPF AVDD 1.4V
Q3204
TO 1.4V (CH1)
33 2 1
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION SHOE ON LPF VIF 1.4V
4
MAIN P.C.B. CHAGE/BATT 50
INIT-CHG2 LPF CAM 1.7V
INIT-CHG1
A/D V LPF DIF 2.7V
DC J DET 3 5
A/D I LPF SDRAM 2.7V
CAM ON
VTR ON 43 LPF AVDD 2.7V
BATT INFO AD
BATT E3 CH2 LPF DVDD 2.7V
Q3205
2.7V (CH2)
D1802 2 1
LPF LCD 2.7V
4
TO CN3202 MICOM UNREG 53
BATTERY TERMIANL 6 BATT E3 LPF AA 2.7V
5 BATT INFO AD
1 BATT −
2 BATT − 3 5
D1803
3 BATT +
4 BATT +
FU1801 40
CH3 Q3206 LPF DVDD 2.7V

27 VCC 2.3V (CH3)
2 1
4
Q1806 56
LPF AA 4.7V
IC3202
Q1807 5 V IN TK11146CS V OUT 4 LPF CAM 4.7V
3 5
4.7V REGULATOR
VIF 4.7V
BATT −
IC3201 37 LPF HA 4.7V
8 MB3881
DC/DC CH4 Q3207
3 CONVERTER P5V (CH4)
2 1
IC3204
1 CONTROL 4
5 V IN TK11133CS V OUT 4 LPF HA 3.3V
2 57 3.3V REGULATOR
USB 3.3V
5
7
6 3 5 P 5V
IC1801 21
MM6564xF
OPE AMP CH5 Q3208 DRUM VS TO
DRUM VM (CH5) CAP VS SERVO SECTION
2 1 MAIN P.C.B.
4
22 60
3 5
15
CH6 Q3209
CAP VM (CH6)
2 1 D3203
4
16 61 LPF CCD 15V
3 5
11
Q3203 T3201
ON/OFF CCD (CH7)
CONT. CH7
D3205
31 CH7 4
5 LPF CCD −7V
62
TO 28 CH1,3,4,8
3
VTR ON AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
MAIN P.C.B. 30 CH5,6
2
29 CH2
7
5
1 8
CH8
64
Q3210
D3201
LPF LCD 12V
Q3202
Q3201

EVF SECTION MVX3i E
MAIN P.C.B. (10/10) Q1506

CVF P.C.B.
LCD 2.7V EVF 3V
Q1505
Q1507
Q1513 LCD 12V EVF 8.5V
EVF A3V
Q1510
133 27 1 11 12 49 57
EVF 8V ON
EVF ON
VDD1
VDD2
VDD0
VCC1
SYNC IN
7 DATA
CN62
SCS7 190 6 LOAD
CN1501 VDD 17 EVF LCD
EVF A8.5V VDD 17 CN61 CSH 16
Q2301 XSTH 17 XSTH 23 6 VDD CSV 8
Q1504
XSTH 22 1 XSTH XSTH 22
STH 18
VF R2 312 53 R IN STH 21 2 STH STH 21
CKH1 20 CKH1 20 3 CKH1 CKH1 19
CKH2 18 5 CKH2 CKH2 18
CKH2 19
VF B2 175 55 B IN G 16 7 G G 15
GOUT 43 R 15 8 R R 14
B 14 9 B B 13
ROUT 45
VF G2 91 54 G IN DSG 12 11 DSG DSG 12
BOUT 40 XDSG 11 12 XDSG XDSG 11
Q2302
Q1503 DSD 10 13 DSD DSD 10
IC2301 (4/4) P5V
DSG 24
ENB 8 15 ENB ENB 7
MB87M1255 IC1501 XDSG 23 XENB 7 16 XENB XENB 6
VIC3 Q1508 Q1509 LV4141W XSTV 6 17 XSTV XSTV 5
DSDOUT 50
CTL1 224 EVF DRIVER STV 5 18 STV STV 4
ENB 30 CKV2 4 19 CKV2 CKV2 3
CKV1 3 20 CKV1 CKV1 2
Q2303 Q1502 XENB 29
COM 2 21 COM COM 1
XSTV 25 BL5V 1 22 BL5V VBB 9
VF R1 251 VBB 9 23 BL5V
STV 26
14 VBB
CKV2 27 ZD1501
VF B1 311
CKV1 28
VF G1 174 LED61
CN2900 ZD61
Q2304
COMOUT 38 EVF COM B11 N.C
Q1501
EVF G A12
8 SCK EVF R A11
EVF B B12
Q62 Q61
CSYBC0 69 60 HD IN HD 15 EVF HD B1
TO PANEL/EVF/IS CLK
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION CSYNC
MAIN P.C.B.
PANEL R
PANEL B
PANEL G
PANEL/EVF/IS/SO

R-KEY,LCD SECTION MVX3i E
C-KEY FPC UNIT SW6
DATA COMMUNICATION D
SW5 SW1
A
LCD OPEN SW W/B KEY2
SW2
W/B KEY1
R-KEY P.C.B. CN72 SW3

EXP DIAL 1 1 EXP DIAL FOCUS A/M
CN70 KEY AD4 2 4 PNL OPEN SW
31 KEY AD4 PNL OPEN SW 4 2 KEY AD4
30 EXP DIAL SW4
29 PANELPEN SW CUSTOM
15 PANEL/EVF/IS CLK
14 PANEL/EVF/IS SO
13 LCD CS
12 LCD EEP CS
11 LCD EEP SIN
10 LCD BL ON
9 LCD ON
22
25
CSYNC
PANEL B LCD P.C.B. VTR UNREG
26 PANEL G
27 PANEL R
VTR T4201
5 VTR UNREG 5 UNREG CPU9D25
6 VTR UNREG Q4201
SWITCH
32 CARD MO/ST SW CN74 CN901 ON
33 CARD FUTA DET LCD BL ON 3 3 LCD BL ON 1 CONTROL 4 4 7
SW70 SI
1 KEY AD1 LCD EEP SIN 6 6 LCD EEP SIN
ZD70 COVER CARD ECS 3
2 KEY AD2 LCD EEP CS 7 7 LCD EEP CS
SEN
28 PANEL BT SW LCD CS 8 8 LCD CS 3 2
SO
49 MMC RSV PANEL/EVF/IS SO 9 9 EEP/PANEL EVF SO IC4201
CLK
48 MMC CMD PANEL/EVF/IS CLK 10 10 EEP/PANEL/EVF CLK 1
SW71 R1223N152H
47 MMC DAT2 LCD ON 12 12 LCD ON
CARD DC/DC 3 2 1 5 6
44 MMC SCK VTR UNREG 1 1 VTR UNREG VTR UNREG
40 MMC DAT
MOVE/STILL CONVERTER 5
38 MMC DAT1
LCD12V Q901 CONTROL Q4202
35 MMC VDD DRIVER VTR UNREG
SW75 SW72 4
34 CARD DET LCD 3V Q905
TO 4 CARD PRO REW/− STOP
WP4201
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 3 LI 3V 12V Q4203
MAIN P.C.B. 19
CN103 LCD 2.7V
20 LCD 2.7V SW76 SW73 BACK LIGHT
Q902
21 LCD 2.7V LCD 2.7V PLAY MIX
LCD 3.0 WP4202
SW77 SW74 E CS
TB70 CS 1 REF 27
SEN
FF/+ REC 31 SEN
CLK PSIG OUT 14
SK 2
CLK
TB71 LCD 3V 8 VCC 32 SCK G OUT 12
SO
DI 3
LITHIUM IC901 SO R OUT 10
33 SDAT
BATTERY BR9010RFV DO 4
SI
B OUT 8 CN903
EEPROM RGT 2
COM 6
CN4000 BLUE 3
1 MMC RSV CN73 CN902 VST 3 RED 4
2 MMC CMD CSYNC 4 4 CSYNC 25 SYNC IN GREEN 5
4 MMC VDD PANEL B 7 7 PANEL B IC902 VCK 2
PSIG 6
5 MMC CLK PANEL G 8 8 PANEL G
Q903 CXM3004R EN 1 HCK1 7
7 MMC DAT PANEL R 9 9 PANEL R 24 B/B-Y LCD DRIVE HCK2 8
RGT 40
SD CARD 8 MMC DAT1 LCD 3V LCD 2.7V 2 2 LCD 2.7V LCD 2.7V REF 11
9 MMC DAT2 HCK1 42 HST 12
Q904
10 CATD PRO CN71 WIDE 13
HCK2 43
12 CARD DET PANEL BT SW 1 DWN 19
LCD 2.7V 3 22 G/Y HST 44 EN 20
VCK 21
WIDE 46
23 R/R-Y VST 22
DWN 47 COM 23
POF
Q906 Q907 CEXL/FLEXL 9
LCD FPC UNIT 36 SLVSG

VDD
14
18 LCD UNIT
VDDG 16
IC1 CN1 ZD901 VSSG 15 LCD
LCD 2.7V 5 VCC AN48810B OUT 1 PANEL BT SW 1
HALL LCD 2.7V 3 ZD902

LJ-2,DC,SJACK SECTION MVX3i E
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
LJ-2 P.C.B. DC P.C.B.

CN1
DC + TO
DC JACK SW
CN3201
DC −
AV JACK
CN2961
TO 10 AV R SJACK P.C.B.
W-LED FPC UNIT 7 AV DET CN2963 CN50
5 V I/O NET PW SW 7 TO
POWER SWITCH ASS'Y
8 AV L VTR PW SW 6
13 EXT L CAM PW SW 5
14 EXT P DET S/S SW 4
15 EXT R CN2962 DVDD2.7V 3
2 P GY OUT VTR PW LED 2
18 CH UNREG CAM PW LED 1
19 CHANGE LED
MIC JACK
3 CAM 2.7V
CN51
CN53 CAM PW LED 20 TO
VTR PW LED 19 MAIN P.C.B.
DVDD2.7V 18 CN2952
YG CG S/S SW 17
IC1691 CAM PW SW 16
4 OUT ENC.03JA VCC 1 Y C VTR PW SW 15
PSENSOR GYRO NET PW SW 14
HP DET 3
S DET 12 TO
C I/O 11 MAIN P.C.B.
Y I/O 9 CN2952
LED499 CN54
HP COM 7
HP L 6
HP COM 5
HP R 4
HEAD PHONE SP + 2
JACK SP − 1
CN52
SP − 1
SP + 2
SPEAKER

CZ Chart
Siemens Chart

Canon Mvx3i e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Mvx3i e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Video Product

The Ultimate Megapixel Camcorder Model

1-2 Main Features

(2) Slim, horizontal design

(3) Incorporating 10x high-performance, high image quality lens

(4) Enhanced multimedia support

(5) Enhanced digital camera functions

(6) Built-in white LED

(7) My Camera audio support New Feature

1-2-1 Features and Design

Built-in flash Program AE

Manual focus ring

Audio level button

Zoom lens Exposure lock / Exposure

1-2-2 Enhanced Still Image Function

(2) Compatible with Video Flash Light VFL-1

(3) AEB photography function

Under Normal exposure Over

(4) AF frame selection function

(5) Simultaneous recording of motion videos and still images

1-2-3 Support for Camera Direct Print and PictBridge

Card size prints Camera Direct Print compatible printer

Printer cable CP-10

1-3 Function and Performance Comparison Chart

2-1-1 Design Concept

(2) SLIM & REFINED

(3) EASY OPERATION

2-2 High Magnification Zoom Lens

2-2-1 Lens Concept

2-3 DV Messenger 2 (DV Messenger Version2)

● Realtime camera motion video communication (videophone)

● Transmissions of motion video

● Camcorder operations (Canon digital camcorders only)

2-3-1 Required Equipment

• Speaker or headphones (when using DV Messenger)

2-3-2 To Use DV Messenger

2-3-3 Operating Environment

DV Messenger usage example

2-3-4 Comparison of DVM 1.0 and 2.0 Specifications

Function 1.0 2.0

2-3-5 DVM 2.0 Compatible Camcorder

Function IEEE1394 USB

*1: Except for MV200E, 200iE

2-4-1 About PictBridge

1-1. Background to Establishment

Digital Camera Printer

1-3. What is PictBridge?

A company's method B company's method C company's method

1-4. The PictBridge Philosophy

2-1. The PictBridge Features

1) Connect the cable

● More convenient print settings

· Specify image size of prints (see Figure 4)

2) Set the printing area 3) Press the print

2-2. Technical Features

DIGITAL CAMERA PRINTER

(1) USB Interface, PTP Communication Protocol

(2) Employs a Client/Server Communication Model

Digital Print Print Printer

(3) Forward-thinking Transport-independent Interface

Ex. Connections over a LAN

3-1. Print Features

DPS DPS DPS DPS

3-2. System Overview